Next, locate product template file
product.liquid
Search for an element with this code: {% app_snippet 'product/button' %}
Then paste snippet after that element.
This should place back-in-stock widget just below add cart button.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Adding back-in-stock to EasyStore collection page
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318816782/adding-back-in-stock-to-easystore-collection-page
In order to add back-in-stock to EasyStore collection page, you need to use custom triggers and modify theme code. Below we will guide you through the setup.
Install Back In Stock
First, ensure that you've already install back-in-stock to your EasyStore site.
Adding Snippet
Locate collection product file from EasyStore admin:
product-grid-item.liquid
Search for this code: {% app_snippet 'collection/product_bottom' %}
Paste the following snippet after that line.
{% if product.available != 1 and product.available != true %}{% endif %}
What this snippet does is that it will display a back-in-stock trigger link if product is not available. Keep point to note is that we're using data attribute to pass EasyStore product data: data-easystore-product="{{ product | json | escape }}"
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Back In Stock on Shopline
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319768268/install-back-in-stock-on-shopline
Install Back In Stock App
Shopline merchants can use Back In Stock extension by installing the app from Shopline app store.
Back In Stock Shopline Listing
After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced.
Setup Email Profile & Domain
To send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.
Go to email profiles page.
If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.
For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well.
Setup Back In Stock
Go to overview page and add a Back In Stock for your account.
Select Settings > Triggers that you want to use for back-in-stock. At least 1 trigger should be selected. Configure the rest of settings according to your preferences and save.
How to install widget?
Go to your Shopline theme and switch to Products page. Ideally, select a product that is currently out-of-stock so we can preview out-of-stock widgets in your editor. If the currently selected product isn't out-of-stock, our back-in-stock widgets won't be shown.
1) Ensure that you are on Products page.
2) Select Theme Settings at bottom left.
3) Under App Embeds, look for Back-In-Stock and turn it on.
4) To display floating button for back-in-stock, you can turn on BackInStock Floating Button.
How to display inline widgets for back-in-stock?
1) From sidebar, select app extension for back-in-stock inline widgets. The following widgets are available.
Inline Button
Inline Text
Inline Form
2) In our example, we've added inline button and inline form
How to setup back-in-stock for collections page?
See adding back-in-stock to Shopline collections page
Test your back-in-stock setup
Follow this guide to test your back-in-stock setup and ensure that it is working as expected.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
What's Next
We recommend reading the following articles to further understand how you can customize back-in-stock.
List of available back-in-stock triggers
Troubleshooting for Back In Stock
---
# Adding back-in-stock to Shopline collection page
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319216104/adding-back-in-stock-to-shopline-collection-page
Adding back-in-stock to Shopline collection page, allows your users to opt-in for back-in-stock notifications directly via collections page without having to view product page.
Install Back In Stock
First, ensure that you've already install back-in-stock to your Shopline store.
Setup for back-in-stock for collections page
1) Go to your Shopline theme and switch to Collections page.
2) Select Theme Settings at bottom left.
3) Under App Embeds, look for BackInStock Collection Page and turn it on. You can customize trigger text style from there.
Keep in mind that trigger text will only be shown for products that are fully out-of-stock.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Back In Stock on Wix
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319685869/install-back-in-stock-on-wix
Wix merchants can use Back In Stock by installing the app from Wix app store. See all our Wix apps.Setup Guide for WixAfter your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced. OnVoard Back-In-Stock VS Wix Back-In-StockBy default, Wix comes with it's own back-in-stock feature. See advantages to use OnVoard back-in-stock. Before you BeginEnsure that you have activated Wix back-in-stock feature. This is required because Wix won't allow users to select out-of-stock variant if back-in-stock is not turned on. When OnVoard back-in-stock widget is active, we will automatically hide Wix's back-in-stock widget.Things to KnowWhen configuring product in Wix, manage/track inventory must be turned on in order to display back-in-stock widget for that specific product.Since Wix doesn't support products tagging, tags whitelist/blacklist won't be available for Wix merchants. Setup Email Profile & DomainTo send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.Go to email profiles page.If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well. Setup Back In StockGo to overview page and add a Back In Stock for your account. Select Settings > Triggers that you want to use for back-in-stock. At least 1 trigger should be selected. Configure the rest of settings according to your preferences and save. Test your back-in-stock setupFollow this guide to test your back-in-stock setup and ensure that it is working as expected. Widgets not Working?See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us. What's NextWe recommend reading the following articles to further understand how you can customize back-in-stock.List of available back-in-stock triggersAdding back-in-stock to Wix collection pageTroubleshooting for Back In Stock
---
# Adding back-in-stock to Wix collection page
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319225318/adding-back-in-stock-to-wix-collection-page
In order to add back-in-stock to Wix collection page, you need to add custom code to your Wix site. Install Back In StockFirst, ensure that you've already install back-in-stock to your Wix store. Adding Custom Code to Body FooterSee how you can add custom code for Wix.Go to Settings in your site's dashboard.Click the Custom Code tab in the Advanced section.Add code to Body - EndUse the following configAdd Code to Pages: Load code on each new pagePlace Code in: Body - endCode Type: EssentialPaste the following snippet
Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# OnVoard Back-In-Stock VS Wix Back-In-Stock
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318912824/onvoard-back-in-stock-vs-wix-back-in-stock
By default, Wix comes with it's own back-in-stock feature. Below are the features you have with OnVoard back-in-stock that doesn't exists in Wix's back-in-stock.
Multiple Triggers
Beside inline button, we provide 4 different built-in triggers for back-in-stock.
Double Opt-In
Send double opt-in confirmation email when a user subscribes. Subscribers who didn't confirm opt-in will not receive back-in-stock emails. This can be used for merchants who need to adhere to regulations like GDPR.
Subscribe Multiple Variants
OnVoard's back-in-stock tool allows users to subscribe to multiple product variants within a single form. If you are using other back-in-stock tools, your users will need to submit multiple forms for them to subscribe multiple product variants. For example, if a user wants to subscribe to any of "S/Red, S/Blue and S/Green", they need to submit 3 times when using other back-in-stock tools.
Display when any product variant is out-of-stock
Sometimes, back-in-stock option may not be obvious to your user since they need to select the out-of-stock variant before back-in-stock is shown. To resolve that, you can opt to show back-in-stock option if any product variant is out-of-stock. See how you can display back-in-stock when any product variant is out-of-stock.
Minimum Quantity
You can set minimum required number of stock units before we generate notifications. This can be used for popular items to prevent disappointing users with back-in-stock notifications when stocks are running low.
Batch Notifications
For popular items, you can use batch notifications to deliver notifications in batches instead of notifying all subscribers at once. This is very handy when you have limited stocks for popular items and won't want to disappoint subscribers who get notified for items that quickly runs out again.
Collect back-in-stock requests in collection page
With OnVoard back-in-stock, you can collect back-in-stock requests in collection page.
Gauge Products Demand
Use inventory dashboard to view the most in-demand products that are currently out of stock.
---
# Integrate Pagefly with OnVoard Back In Stock
Topic: Back In Stock | Section: Integrations
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319625781/integrate-pagefly-with-onvoard-back-in-stock
You can add back-in-stock triggers like inline button and inline text to pagefly product page.
OnVoard Back In Stock element for Pagefly.
Pagefly App Listing
---
# Setting up Reviews App
Topic: Reviews | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319335574/setting-up-reviews-app
OnVoard's reviews app is an app to help ecommerce store turn customer voice into marketing engine. You can use reviews app to automate reviews collection process and embed them onto your site.
See in-depth setup instructions for based on your ecommerce platform:
Setting up Reviews App for Shopify Merchants
Setting up Reviews App for BigCommerce Merchants
Setting up Reviews App for EasyStore Merchants
Setting up Reviews App for Shopline Merchants
Setting up Reviews App for Wix Merchants
---
# Import Existing Reviews via CSV
Topic: Reviews | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319120359/import-existing-reviews-via-csv
You can import existing reviews to OnVoard via CSV upload. Before you BeginGo to products page and ensure that products are already imported to OnVoard if you are importing product reviews. This is required since product reviews needs to be linked to a product. It may take up to a few hours for products to be fully imported once you have connect to your ecommerce platform. CSV RequirementsMust use comma (,) as delimiter.Must use double quotes (") as quote char. Import Existing ReviewsGo to imports job page and add a new import job.Select Reviews for Data Type and attach csv file for import. On next step, specify field mappings and other configurations for import. Below are the available fields. FieldDescriptionExampleRequiredID (OnVoard Review)Review ID in OnVoard. Only use this if you want to bulk update existing reviews.rvw_dg7bn6ksvwvidiaNoTitleTitle for review.AwesomeNoContentContent for review. This is a good product.YesRatingA score from 0-5, where 5 represents the most positive review.4YesImage URLsString array for list of image urls for review. Values can be in comma-separated string format as well. Support single image url as well.[
"https://test.com/1.jpg",
"https://test.com/2.jpg"
]"https://test.com/1.jpg",
"https://test.com/2.jpg"https://test.com/1.jpgNoVideo URLsString array for list of video urls for review. Values can be in comma-separated string format as well. Support single video url as well. Video must be .mp4 file under 30MB. This is an optional field.[
"https://test.com/1.mp4",
"https://test.com/2.mp4"
]"https://test.com/1.mp4",
"https://test.com/2.mp4"https://test.com/1.mp4NoCreated DatetimeReview created datetime in ISO 8601 format.2020-02-01T21:11:51.205173-11:00NoProduct External IDID of reviewed product on ecommerce platform. This is used to identify reviewed product. For product reviews, at least one of Product External ID, Product Handle must be mapped.124556MaybeProduct HandleHandle for reviewed product on ecommerce platform. This is used to identify reviewed product. For product reviews, at least one of Product External ID, Product Handle must be mapped.white-tshirtMaybeReviewer Display NameDisplay name of reviewer.John DoeYesReviewer EmailEmail of reviewer. john@example.comYesNum UpvotesNumber of upvotes for this review. Default value is 0.0NoReply HTMLBusiness reply for review in HTML. Even though HTML is indicated, plain text reply will work as well.
Thank you for your review!
Thank you for reviewing!NoReply DatetimeReply datetime in ISO 8601 format.2020-03-01T21:11:51.205173-11:00No Content, Rating , Reviewer Display Name and Reviewer Email must be mapped.For product reviews, at least one of Product External ID, Product Handle must be mapped.
---
# Ways to Collect Reviews
Topic: Reviews | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318766158/ways-to-collect-reviews
Below are ways you can collect reviews with OnVoard.
Reviews Collector
Hosted page to collect reviews.
Can collect reviews for multiple products.
Can be configured to serve via your own url (like reviews.example.com)
Common workflow is to direct users from review request emails to collector page.
See how you can setup reviews collector.
Reviews Widget
Embedded on product page.
Collect reviews for single product.
Visitors can view and submit reviews for product.
See how you can setup reviews widget.
---
# Use OnVoard's marketing platform to send reviews emails
Topic: Reviews | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318696310/use-onvoards-marketing-platform-to-send-reviews-emails
One key differentiation of using OnVoard to send reviews emails is that besides the built-in email sending from our Reviews app, you can opt to use Marketing Platform app to fully customize workflows and reviews emails. Here are the pros and cons for using Marketing Platform to send reviews emails.
Pros
Fully customize emails: You can add additional blocks to your email content and go beyond the default email templates used by reviews apps.
Control workflows: When you use marketing platform to send reviews emails, you get to fully control the workflows for each steps. For example, you can add a branch step to send a different reviews emails to users who've spent more than $500 within a single order. Or you can setup to get notified whenever someone leaves a review.
Cons
More complex: Setting up marketing platform to send reviews emails requires much more work on your end and can be challenging for non-technical users. For starters, we recommend to first try using the built-in Reviews app for email sending, and only use marketing platform to send reviews emails when your use case requires you to.
Email sends usage: Using marketing platform to send reviews emails will count towards email sends usage for marketing platform app. You may incur additional sending cost when switching to use marketing platform to send reviews emails.
Below we shall walk you through on how you can use marketing platform to send reviews emails.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you are connected to OnVoard's marketing platform app. Go to marketing platform's connections page and check that there's an active connection to your ecommerce store.
Ensure that you have done initial setup for Reviews app.
Disable Reviews App Email Sending
Go to reviews overview page and edit config.
Disable email sending and save your config.
Review Request Workflow
Follow guides below to setup review request workflow:
Shopify Review Request Workflow
EasyStore Review Request Workflow
BigCommerce Review Request Workflow
Post Reviewed Workflow
Use the guide below to automatically send an email with coupon discount when someone leaves a review.
Post Reviewed Workflow
Review Replied Workflow
Use the guide below to send reviewers a notification email after their review has been replied by admin.
Review Replied Workflow
Negative Review Notification Workflow
Use the guide below to get notified when you receive negative review.
Negative Review Notification Workflow
---
# Setting up Reviews Collector
Topic: Reviews | Section: Reviews Collector
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319393252/setting-up-reviews-collector
Reviews collector page can be used to collect product/site reviews. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.
Create Reviews Collector
Go to reviews collector page and add a new collector.
Some points to note:
Layout can be for Product or Site.
Custom Page can be specified if you want to serve collector page via your own url (like reviews.example.com). See how you can setup custom page.
Can display up to 5 products.
Reviewer must specify Display Name and Email when submitting review.
URL Parameters
Product IDs
When using product layout, we will pick random products to collect reviews. This default behavior is generally used for previewing reviews collector page. In actual production, you should specify url parameters to tell us which products you want to collect reviews.
Use product_ids=PRODUCT_A_ID,PRODUCT_B_ID with comma-seperated ID values for list of products you wish to collect reviews.
https://reviews.example.com?product_ids=prd_wpgnildbgg50k5u,prd_d69ctxwe7cr52am
Alternatively, you can pass product_external_ids to retrieve products using product IDs from ecommerce platform.
https://reviews.example.com?product_external_ids=4169648570416,4510810767408
Additional Parameters
You can pass display_name and email to pre-populate these 2 fields.
---
# Auto Generate Reviews Collector URL in Email
Topic: Reviews | Section: Reviews Collector
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319017464/auto-generate-reviews-collector-url-in-email
When setting up email, you can configure to auto generate reviews collector url. This eliminates the manual work in appending GET parameters to reviews collector url.
First, go to Settings tab inside email editor.
Add an order related resource that has "products" data as property. Below is a list of order related resources that you can use:
Shopify Order
Shopify Order Fulfilled
Shopify Order Placed
BigCommerce Order
BigCommerce Order Completed
BigCommerce Order Placed
EasyStore Order
EasyStore Order Fulfilled
EasyStore Order Placed
After an order related resources have been added, reviews collector section will be shown. Keep in mind this section will only be shown if order related resource is added to email.
Then select Enable Variable. Choose Reviews Collector and Resource to use for generating reviews collector url. Once configured, OnVoard will automatically generate reviews collector url using product IDs from selected resource. misc.reviews_collector_url variable will be available for you to link users to reviews collector page.
---
# Specify products for reviews collector page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Reviews Collector
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318854270/specify-products-for-reviews-collector-page
When using product layout, we will pick random products to collect reviews. This default behavior is generally used for previewing reviews collector page. In actual production, you should specify url parameters to tell us which products you want to collect reviews.
Use product_ids=PRODUCT_A_ID,PRODUCT_B_ID with comma-seperated ID values for list of products you wish to collect reviews.
https://reviews.example.com?product_ids=prd_wpgnildbgg50k5u,prd_d69ctxwe7cr52am
Alternatively, you can pass product_external_ids to retrieve products using product IDs from ecommerce platform.
https://reviews.example.com?product_external_ids=4169648570416,4510810767408
---
# Why OnVoard don't allow users to submit reviews via email forms
Topic: Reviews | Section: Reviews Collector
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318665474/why-onvoard-dont-allow-users-to-submit-reviews-via-email-forms
Allowing users to submit reviews via email forms is a very bad practice. Even though this is used by many reviews vendors, OnVoard choose to adopt to best practices for email marketing and not support forms submission via email.
Embedded forms within email are generally "insecure" for recipient. In the past, scammers frequently use embedded form to trick recipients into submitting their bank details.
Not all email clients support embedded forms.
Embedding forms into email heavily increase the odds of email being treated as spam. At OnVoard, we also run an email marketing platform. We know first hand how challenging it is to get email delivered right into inbox.
Practices such as allow users to submit reviews via email forms should be frown upon. Just ask yourself, if forms submission via email is viable, why every single major survey platforms like SurveyMonkey, Google Forms and Typeform require you to go-through a link to fill in a survey.
---
# Setting up Reviews Widget
Topic: Reviews | Section: Widgets
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319359615/setting-up-reviews-widget
Reviews widget can be embedded on your site to display reviews for a specific product/site.
See in-depth setup instructions for various ecommerce platforms:
Install Reviews Widget on Shopify Product Page
Install Reviews Widget on BigCommerce Product Page
Install Reviews Widget on EasyStore
Install Reviews Widget on WooCommerce
---
# Setting up Star Rating
Topic: Reviews | Section: Widgets
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319094366/setting-up-star-rating
Star rating can be embedded on your site to display overall ratings for a specific product/site.
See in-depth setup instructions for various ecommerce platforms:
Install Star Rating on Shopify Product Page
Install Star Rating on Shopify Collection Page
Install Star Rating on BigCommerce Product Page
Install Star Rating on BigCommerce Category Page
Install Star Rating on EasyStore
Install Star Rating on WooCommerce
---
# Why star rating widget is not showing on page?
Topic: Reviews | Section: Widgets
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318875214/why-star-rating-widget-is-not-showing-on-page
Here are some reasons why star rating widget is not showing on your page.
No published reviews for specified product/site.
Status is not active.
Misconfiguration. Ensure that correct values has been passed for star rating widget ID and product/site ID.
---
# When will review request email be delivered?
Topic: Reviews | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319439915/when-will-review-request-email-be-delivered
By default, review request email will be automatically delivered after an order has been marked as fulfilled on the ecommerce platform that you are using (Shopify, EasyStore etc)
If you've specified review request delay days to a value other than 0, we will delay sending review request emails accordingly.
---
# Can I send review requests to past orders?
Topic: Reviews | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319155378/can-i-send-review-requests-to-past-orders
Yes, this feature is recently supported. To send review requests for past purchases, you can go to reviews overview. Max lookback is 90 days.Select Send Review Request and specify number of days to lookback for past orders.Keep in mind that for most ecommerce platforms, order must be marked as fulfilled before review request emails will be delivered.Eligible orders will be added to delivery queue. Delay days for review requests will be applied accordingly.We will also skip orders that have already delivered review request.After confirming, wait for a few mins for emails to be delivered. Then go to reviews emails page to view delivered emails.
---
# How to get verified badge for reviews
Topic: Reviews | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318944991/how-to-get-verified-badge-for-reviews
OnVoard will automatically mark a review as verified if reviewers' email address matches customer email address from your store's order records.
---
# Generate Product Reviews Feed for Google Shopping Ads
Topic: Reviews | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318771321/generate-product-reviews-feed-for-google-shopping-ads
OnVoard support generating product reviews feed for Google Shopping Ads.
To enable google product reviews feed, edit reviews config, and Enable Google Product Reviews Feed. Then save the config.
From reviews overview page, look for google product reviews feed url.
Copy the url and submit feed url to Google Merchant Centre.
To improve xml output performance, we'll cache feed XML and update it periodically (once a day).
---
# Access scopes changes for Reviews app
Topic: Reviews | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318476319/access-scopes-changes-for-reviews-app
ShopifyDec 2020write_script_tags - Allow OnVoard to use script tags to install our scripts. This method is preferred since our third party loading scripts will be automatically removed when you uninstall our app. Mar 2026read_all_orders - Changes to graphql endpoint require us to have this access scope. Also use this to be able to attribute historical conversion.Nov 2021write_products - Allow OnVoard to update product metafields.
---
# Setting up Reviews App for Shopify Merchants
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319486008/setting-up-reviews-app-for-shopify-merchants
For Shopify merchants, you can follow steps below to setup reviews app. Install Reviews AppOnVoard Reviews Shopify Listing After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced. Keep in mind that reviews widgets won't be shown until a product has been imported. Setup Email Profile & DomainTo send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.Go to email profiles page.If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well. Setup Reviews CollectorTo start collecting reviews for your products/site, you would need to setup reviews collector. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.Go to reviews collector page.If reviews collector if not created, follow this guide to setup reviews collector. Setup Reviews ConfigGo to reviews overview page and setup reviews config for your account. Keep in mind that both Email Profile and Reviews Collector must be provided if you want to use Reviews app to send reviews emails. If you haven't setup any of these 2, go back to previous steps and set them up before proceeding. Customize Reviews EmailsAfter reviews config is setup, you can customize reviews emails.Go to reviews overview page and click Customize Emails to start customizing your reviews emails.Review Request Emails: Once reviews config is setup, OnVoard will immediately send review request emails after an order is fulfilled from your store. Reminder Emails: Use this to remind customers to leave reviews if they didn't do so after the first review request email is sent.Post-Reviewed Emails: Will be immediately send to reviewers after they have left a review. You can use post-reviewed email to reward reviewers with discount coupons.Review Replied Emails: Will be send to reviewers when store has responded to their reviews. You can use this to notify reviewers and let them know your response to their reviews.After reviews emails is delivered, go to reviews emails page to view stats and analytics for each email. You can even see how much revenue each reviews email is generating for your store. Display Reviews on your SiteBesides setting up reviews collections, you would also want to showcase these reviews on your site. Setup reviews widget to display product reviews.Setup star rating to display overall ratings for each product. Import Existing Reviews (Optional)For merchants migrating from another reviews vendor, you may want to import existing reviews into OnVoard. Feel free to contact us if need us to support importing reviews from a non-supported source. Do also attached CSV template for source that you need us to support. Need help installing?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com Uninstalling AppSee Uninstallation notes for Shopify users.
---
# Install Reviews Widget on Shopify Product Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319038433/install-reviews-widget-on-shopify-product-page
Follow instructions below to install reviews widget on Shopify Product Page.
To start, go to reviews widget page and add reviews widget.
Install Widget
After reviews widget is created. Select Show Instructions to view installation instructions.
Installation Instructions
1) Initialize App
Click on Initialize App button to setup app for your theme. This is a mandatory step, even for manual installation.
2) App Block Installation
Use app block installation if your theme supports Online Store 2.0. For vintage themes, you would need to install manually. If app block installation work, you can skip Manual Installation step.
3) Manual Installation
Use this if you're using vintage theme. Snippet should look something like this:
Place snippet to bottom of templates/product.liquid file and save it. Once that is done, reviews widget will be shown at bottom of your product page.
Reviews widget not showing for some products?
Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display reviews widget.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on Shopify Product Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318737866/install-star-rating-on-shopify-product-page
Follow instructions below to install star rating on Shopify Product Page.
To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating.
Install Star Rating
After star rating is created. Select Show Instructions to view installation instructions.
Installation Instructions
1) Initialize App
Click on Initialize App button to setup app for your theme. This is a mandatory step, even for manual installation.
2) App Block Installation
Use app block installation if your theme supports Online Store 2.0. For vintage themes, you would need to install manually. If app block installation work, you can skip Manual Installation step.
3) Manual Installation
Use this if you're using vintage theme. Snippet should look something like this:
Locate product template file
sections/product-template.liquid
templates/product.liquid
Search for an element with this code: itemprop="name"
Then paste snippet after that element.
This should position star rating just below product title element.
Star rating not showing for some products?
Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on Shopify Collection Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318667837/install-star-rating-on-shopify-collection-page
Follow instructions below to install star rating on Shopify Collection Page.
To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating.
Install Star Rating
After star rating is created. Select Show Instructions to view installation instructions.
Installation Instructions
1) Initialize App
Click on Initialize App button to setup app for your theme. This is a mandatory step, even for manual installation.
2) Manual Installation
For collection, only manual installation can be used for collection page. Snippet should look something like this:
Next, locate collection product file
product-grid-item.liquid
product-card.liquid
product-card-grid.liquid
Keep in mind that collection product file can have many different names but the ones above are the most common ones.
Search for an element with this code: {{ product.title }}
Then paste snippet after that element.
This should position star rating just below product title element in collection page.
Using Product Metafields (Alternate Method)
Most Online Store 2.0 themes use product metafields to display ratings in product grid.
If your theme has built-in support for displaying ratings in product grid, you can use OnVoard to sync rating and rating count metadata. See Sync Shopify Product Rating Metafields.
Star rating not showing for some products?
Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Uninstalling Reviews App for Shopify users
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318535085/uninstalling-reviews-app-for-shopify-users
If you're using app blocks for installation our scripts should be automatically removed from your storefront upon app uninstallation. Regardless, we recommend referring to the following uninstallation notes to double confirm scripts have been removed.
Uninstallation notes for Shopify users
---
# Sync Shopify Product Rating Metafields
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318429507/sync-shopify-product-rating-metafields
If your theme has built-in support for displaying ratings in product grid, you can use OnVoard to sync rating and rating count metadata.
Auto sync product metafields
Go to reviews config page and turn on Sync Metafields. If this is turned on, we will update product metafields whenever a linked a review is created/updated.
Sync metafields for all products
To sync metafields for all products, go to Shopify actions page and click Sync Metafields.
---
# Setting up Reviews App for BigCommerce Merchants
Topic: Reviews | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319547482/setting-up-reviews-app-for-bigcommerce-merchants
BigCommerce merchants can use reviews app by installing the OnVoard's app from BigCommerce app marketplace.Setup Guide for BigCommerceAfter your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced. Keep in mind that reviews widgets won't be shown until a product has been imported. Setup Email Profile & DomainTo send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.Go to email profiles page.If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well. Setup Reviews CollectorTo start collecting reviews for your products/site, you would need to setup reviews collector. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.Go to reviews collector page.If reviews collector if not created, follow this guide to setup reviews collector. Setup Reviews ConfigGo to reviews overview page and setup reviews config for your account. Keep in mind that both Email Profile and Reviews Collector must be provided if you want to use Reviews app to send reviews emails. If you haven't setup any of these 2, go back to previous steps and set them up before proceeding. Customize Reviews EmailsAfter reviews config is setup, you can customize reviews emails.Go to reviews overview page and click Customize Emails to start customizing your reviews emails.Review Request Emails: Once reviews config is setup, OnVoard will immediately send review request emails after an order is marked as completed.Reminder Emails: Use this to remind customers to leave reviews if they didn't do so after the first review request email is sent.Post-Reviewed Emails: Will be immediately send to reviewers after they have left a review. You can use post-reviewed email to reward reviewers with discount coupons.Review Replied Emails: Will be send to reviewers when store has responded to their reviews. You can use this to notify reviewers and let them know your response to their reviews.After reviews emails is delivered, go to reviews emails page to view stats and analytics for each email. You can even see how much revenue each reviews email is generating for your store. Display Reviews on your SiteBesides setting up reviews collections, you would also want to showcase these reviews on your site. Setup reviews widget to display product reviews.Setup star rating to display overall ratings for each product. Disable BigCommerce built-in product reviewsIf you are using OnVoard's reviews app, you should disable BigCommerce built-in product reviews.See guide to disable BigCommerce built-in product reviews. Import BigCommerce Reviews (Optional)See guide to import BigCommerce reviews. Import Existing Reviews via CSV (Optional)For merchants migrating from another reviews vendor, you may want to import existing reviews into OnVoard. Feel free to contact us if need us to support importing reviews from a non-supported source. Do also attached CSV template for source that you need us to support. Need help installing?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# Install Reviews Widget on BigCommerce Product Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319118509/install-reviews-widget-on-bigcommerce-product-page
Follow instructions below to install reviews widget on BigCommerce Product Page. To start, go to reviews widget page and add reviews widget.Demo StoreView demo store to see the widgets live in BigCommerce store. Placement OptionsProduct Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at product page. We will place snippet at bottom of product page. Product Page (Selector) - Use placement tool to visually insert widgets into your site without any technical work. See guide for selector placement.Custom Placement - Manually install widget. Use this as fallback if all other placement methods doesn't work. Custom PlacementClick Show Code to get widget snippet. Snippet should look something like this:
Next, edit BigCommerce theme and locate product view: templates/components/products/product-view.htmlYou can place reviews widget snippet at the bottom of the file.Reviews widget not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display reviews widget. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on BigCommerce Product Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318950569/install-star-rating-on-bigcommerce-product-page
Follow instructions below to install star rating on BigCommerce Product Page. To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating.Demo StoreView demo store to see the widgets live in BigCommerce store. Placement OptionsProduct Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at product page. Product Page (Selector) - Use placement tool to visually insert widgets into your site without any technical work. See guide for selector placement.Custom Placement - Manually install widget. Use this as fallback if all other placement methods doesn't work. Custom PlacementCopy ID for star rating and replace STAR_RATING_ID with it for the following snippet.
Next, edit BigCommerce theme and locate product view: templates/components/products/product-view.htmlSearch for productView-title element. Then paste snippet after it.This should position star rating just below product title element in product page. Star rating not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on BigCommerce Product Card
Topic: Reviews | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318782804/install-star-rating-on-bigcommerce-product-card
Follow instructions below to install star rating on BigCommerce product cards across your store (home page, category pages, search results, and product recommendations)To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating.Demo StoreView demo store to see the widgets live in BigCommerce store.Placement OptionsProduct Card (Auto) -Will automatically show star ratings on product cards across your store (home page, category pages, search results, and product recommendations). Keep in mind that this method may not work for every themes.Custom Placement - Manually install widget. Use this as fallback if all other placement methods doesn't work. Copy ID for star rating and replace STAR_RATING_ID with it for the following snippet.
Next, edit BigCommerce theme and locate category view: templates/components/products/card.htmlSearch for card-title element. Then paste snippet after it.This should position star rating just below product title element in category page.Star rating not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Disable BigCommerce built-in product reviews
Topic: Reviews | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318517672/disable-bigcommerce-built-in-product-reviews
1) Disable BigCommerce Reviews Widget
Go to Advanced Settings > Comments and select Built-in tab.
De-select product reviews and save changes.
2) Disable BigCommerce Review Request Emails
Go to Store Setup > Store Settings and select Miscellaneous tab.
De-select Product Review Emails and save changes.
---
# Import BigCommerce Reviews to OnVoard
Topic: Reviews | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318472556/import-bigcommerce-reviews-to-onvoard
Before you Begin
Go to products page and check that all products have been imported.
If product is not imported, we won't import reviews for it.
To import BigCommerce reviews into OnVoard, you can go to reviews overview.
Select Import Reviews and continue from there. Depending on the number of reviews you have, it may take anywhere from a few minutes to hours for reviews to be fully imported.
Go to reviews page to view imported reviews.
To view logs, you can go to background jobs. Then look for Sync BigCommerce Reviews
---
# Setting up Reviews App for EasyStore Merchants
Topic: Reviews | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319431608/setting-up-reviews-app-for-easystore-merchants
For EasyStore merchants, you can follow steps below to setup reviews app.Install Reviews AppOnVoard Reviews EasyStore Listing After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced. Keep in mind that reviews widgets won't be shown until a product has been imported. Setup Email Profile & DomainTo send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.Go to email profiles page.If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well. Setup Reviews CollectorTo start collecting reviews for your products/site, you would need to setup reviews collector. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.Go to reviews collector page.If reviews collector if not created, follow this guide to setup reviews collector. Setup Reviews ConfigGo to reviews overview page and setup reviews config for your account. Keep in mind that both Email Profile and Reviews Collector must be provided if you want to use Reviews app to send reviews emails. If you haven't setup any of these 2, go back to previous steps and set them up before proceeding. Customize Reviews EmailsAfter reviews config is setup, you can customize reviews emails.Go to reviews overview page and click Customize Emails to start customizing your reviews emails.Review Request Emails: Once reviews config is setup, OnVoard will immediately send review request emails after an order is fulfilled from your store. Reminder Emails: Use this to remind customers to leave reviews if they didn't do so after the first review request email is sent.Post-Reviewed Emails: Will be immediately send to reviewers after they have left a review. You can use post-reviewed email to reward reviewers with discount coupons.Review Replied Emails: Will be send to reviewers when store has responded to their reviews. You can use this to notify reviewers and let them know your response to their reviews.After reviews emails is delivered, go to reviews emails page to view stats and analytics for each email. You can even see how much revenue each reviews email is generating for your store. Display Reviews on your SiteBesides setting up reviews collections, you would also want to showcase these reviews on your site. Setup reviews widget to display product reviews.Setup star rating to display overall ratings for each product. Import Existing Reviews (Optional)For merchants migrating from another reviews vendor, you may want to import existing reviews into OnVoard. Feel free to contact us if need us to support importing reviews from a non-supported source. Do also attached CSV template for source that you need us to support. Need help installing?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# Install Reviews Widget on EasyStore
Topic: Reviews | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319322208/install-reviews-widget-on-easystore
Follow instructions below to install reviews widget on EasyStore Product Page. To start, go to reviews widget page and add reviews widget. Placement OptionsProduct Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at product page. We will place snippet at bottom of product page. Product Page (Selector) - Use placement tool to visually insert widgets into your site without any technical work. See guide for selector placement.Custom Placement - Manually install widget. Use this as fallback if all other placement methods doesn't work. Custom PlacementClick Show Code to get widget snippet. Snippet should look something like this:
Next, place snippet to bottom of templates/product.liquid file and save it. Once that is done, reviews widget will be shown at bottom of your product page.Reviews widget not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display reviews widget. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on EasyStore
Topic: Reviews | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319096958/install-star-rating-on-easystore
Follow instructions below to install star rating on EasyStore. To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating. Placement OptionsProduct Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at product page. Product Card (Auto) -Will automatically show star ratings on product cards across your store (home page, category pages, search results, and product recommendations). Keep in mind that this method may not work for every themes.Product Page (Selector) - Use placement tool to visually insert widgets into your site without any technical work. See guide for selector placement.Custom Placement - Manually install widget. Use this as fallback if all other placement methods doesn't work.Star rating not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Setting up Reviews App for Shopline Merchants
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319754023/setting-up-reviews-app-for-shopline-merchants
For Shopline merchants, you can follow steps below to setup reviews app. Install Reviews AppOnVoard Reviews Shopline ListingAfter your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced. Keep in mind that reviews widgets won't be shown until a product has been imported. Setup Email Profile & DomainTo send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.Go to email profiles page.If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well. Setup Reviews CollectorTo start collecting reviews for your products/site, you would need to setup reviews collector. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.Go to reviews collector page.If reviews collector if not created, follow this guide to setup reviews collector. Setup Reviews ConfigGo to reviews overview page and setup reviews config for your account. Keep in mind that both Email Profile and Reviews Collector must be provided if you want to use Reviews app to send reviews emails. If you haven't setup any of these 2, go back to previous steps and set them up before proceeding. Customize Reviews EmailsAfter reviews config is setup, you can customize reviews emails.Go to reviews overview page and click Customize Emails to start customizing your reviews emails.Review Request Emails: Once reviews config is setup, OnVoard will immediately send review request emails after an order is fulfilled from your store. Reminder Emails: Use this to remind customers to leave reviews if they didn't do so after the first review request email is sent.Post-Reviewed Emails: Will be immediately send to reviewers after they have left a review. You can use post-reviewed email to reward reviewers with discount coupons.Review Replied Emails: Will be send to reviewers when store has responded to their reviews. You can use this to notify reviewers and let them know your response to their reviews.After reviews emails is delivered, go to reviews emails page to view stats and analytics for each email. You can even see how much revenue each reviews email is generating for your store. Display Reviews on your SiteBesides setting up reviews collections, you would also want to showcase these reviews on your site. Install Reviews Widget on Shopline Product PageInstall Star Rating on Shopline Product PageInstall Star Rating on Shopline Collection Page Import Existing Reviews (Optional)For merchants migrating from another reviews vendor, you may want to import existing reviews into OnVoard. Feel free to contact us if need us to support importing reviews from a non-supported source. Do also attached CSV template for source that you need us to support. Need help installing?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# Install Reviews Widget on Shopline Product Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319273416/install-reviews-widget-on-shopline-product-page
Follow instructions below to install reviews widget on Shopline Product Page.
To start, go to reviews widget page and add reviews widget.
How to install widget?
1) Go to your Shopline theme and switch to Products page.
2) Add Reviews Widget app block.
3) Specify ID for reviews widget and save the theme.
Reviews widget not showing for some products?
Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display reviews widget.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on Shopline Product Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319035661/install-star-rating-on-shopline-product-page
Follow instructions below to install star rating on Shopline Product Page.
To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating.
How to install widget?
1) Go to your Shopline theme and switch to Products page.
2) Add Star Rating app block. Place it after Product Title.
3) Specify ID for star rating and save the theme.
Star rating not showing for some products?
Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on Shopline Collection Page
Topic: Reviews | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318793801/install-star-rating-on-shopline-collection-page
Follow instructions below to install star rating on Shopline Collection Page.
To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating.
How to install widget?
1) Go to your Shopline theme and switch to Collections page.
2) Select Theme Settings at bottom left.
3) Under App Embeds, look for Star Rating Collection Page and turn it on.
Star rating not showing for some products?
Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Setting up Reviews App for Wix
Topic: Reviews | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319612954/setting-up-reviews-app-for-wix
Wix merchants can use Reviews by installing the app from Wix app store. See all our Wix apps.
Setup Guide for Wix
After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync products from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced. Keep in mind that reviews widgets won't be shown until a product has been imported.
Setup Email Profile & Domain
To send notification emails, you need to have at least 1 email profile.
Go to email profiles page.
If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.
For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well.
Setup Reviews Collector
To start collecting reviews for your products/site, you would need to setup reviews collector. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.
Go to reviews collector page.
If reviews collector if not created, follow this guide to setup reviews collector.
Setup Reviews Config
Go to reviews overview page and setup reviews config for your account.
Keep in mind that both Email Profile and Reviews Collector must be provided if you want to use Reviews app to send reviews emails. If you haven't setup any of these 2, go back to previous steps and set them up before proceeding.
Customize Reviews Emails
After reviews config is setup, you can customize reviews emails.
Go to reviews overview page and click Customize Emails to start customizing your reviews emails.
This is an important step to configure so you can specify when customer will receive review request email after they made their purchase.
Review Request Emails: For Wix merchants, you should specify your desired Delay Days value. This is the number to delay before sending review request after an order is created. If set to 0, we will sent review request immediately after an order is made.
Reminder Emails: Use this to remind customers to leave reviews if they didn't do so after the first review request email is sent.
Post-Reviewed Emails: Will be immediately send to reviewers after they have left a review. You can use post-reviewed email to reward reviewers with discount coupons.
Review Replied Emails: Will be send to reviewers when store has responded to their reviews. You can use this to notify reviewers and let them know your response to their reviews.
After reviews emails is delivered, go to reviews emails page to view stats and analytics for each email. You can even see how much revenue each reviews email is generating for your store.
Display Reviews on your Site
Besides setting up reviews collections, you would also want to showcase these reviews on your site.
Setup reviews widget to display product reviews.
Setup star rating to display overall ratings for each product.
Import Existing Reviews (Optional)
For merchants migrating from another reviews vendor, you may want to import existing reviews into OnVoard. Feel free to contact us if need us to support importing reviews from a non-supported source. Do also attached CSV template for source that you need us to support.
Widgets not Working?
See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Reviews Widget on Wix
Topic: Reviews | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319285706/install-reviews-widget-on-wix
Follow instructions below to install reviews widget on Wix Product Page. To start, go to reviews widget page and add reviews widget. Placement OptionsProduct Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at product page. We will place snippet at bottom of product page. Reviews widget not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display reviews widget. Widgets not Working?See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Star Rating on Wix
Topic: Reviews | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318924801/install-star-rating-on-wix
Follow instructions below to install star rating on Wix. To start, go to star ratings page and add star rating. Placement OptionsProduct Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at product page. Collection Page (Auto) - Select this if you want OnVoard to automatically place widget at collection page. Star rating not showing for some products?Go to products page and check if product has been imported to our system. If product has not imported, we won't display star rating. Widgets not Working?See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Setting up Reperks
Topic: Reperks | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319633740/setting-up-reperks
See in-depth setup instructions for based on your ecommerce platform:
Install Reperks on Shopify
Install Reperks on BigCommerce
Install Reperks on EasyStore
Install Reperks on Shopline
Install Reperks on Wix
Reperks Loyalty is a full-featured loyalty program to help your store retain customers and increase lifetime value.
Guide to Setup Loyalty
Campaigns
Merchants can easily setup campaigns to boost store engagement. For example, "Give additional X points when customer spent more than $X during month of August". This kind of seasonal campaigns allows you to setup promotional period to get customers get to your store. For more, see campaigns guides below.
Seasonal Campaigns
Product Campaigns
View All Campaigns
---
# Install Reperks on Shopify
Topic: Reperks | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319271338/install-reperks-on-shopify
Enable Customer Accounts
Before you begin, ensure that customer accounts is enabled for your store. This is mandatory since customer accounts is needed for us to keep track of reperks members.
Customer accounts should be either optional or required.
Install Reperks App
Shopify merchants can use Reperks by installing the app from Shopify app store.
Reperks Shopify Listing
After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync customer, order and product data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced.
Getting Started with Loyalty
Loyalty is a full-featured loyalty program to help your store retain customers and increase lifetime value.
Guide to Setup Loyalty
Install Reperks Widget to Theme
First, go to reperks overview page and ensure that reperks widget is Active.
To install reperks widget to your current theme, go to reperks overview and locate Install Widget to Theme box, then click Install Widget.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Reperks on BigCommerce
Topic: Reperks | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318993066/install-reperks-on-bigcommerce
Install Reperks AppBigCommerce merchants can use Reperks by installing the app from BigCommerce app store. Reperks BigCommerce App ListingAfter your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync customer, order and product data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced.Demo StoreView demo store to see the widgets live in BigCommerce store. Getting Started with LoyaltyLoyalty is a full-featured loyalty program to help your store retain customers and increase lifetime value.Guide to Setup Loyalty Widget InstallationGo to reperks overview page and ensure that reperks widget is Active. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Reperks on EasyStore
Topic: Reperks | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318756831/install-reperks-on-easystore
Install Reperks App
EasyStore merchants can use Reperks by installing the app from EasyStore app store.
Reperks EasyStore Listing
After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync customer, order and product data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced.
Getting Started with Loyalty
Loyalty is a full-featured loyalty program to help your store retain customers and increase lifetime value.
Guide to Setup Loyalty
Widget Installation
Go to reperks overview page and ensure that reperks widget is Active.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Reperks on Shopline
Topic: Reperks | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318564305/install-reperks-on-shopline
Install Reperks App
Shopline merchants can use Reperks by installing the app from Shopline app store.
Reperks Shopline Listing
After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync customer, order and product data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced.
Getting Started with Loyalty
Loyalty is a full-featured loyalty program to help your store retain customers and increase lifetime value.
Guide to Setup Loyalty
Install Reperks Widget to Theme
First, go to reperks overview page and ensure that reperks widget is Active.
1) Go to your Shopline theme and select Theme Settings at bottom left.
2) Under App Embeds, look for Reperks Widget and turn it on.
Remember to save your changes.
---
# Install Reperks on Wix
Topic: Reperks | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318465253/install-reperks-on-wix
Install Reperks App
Wix merchants can use Reperks by installing the app from Wix app store. See all our Wix apps.
Reperks Wix App Listing
Setup Guide for Wix
After your store is connected, OnVoard will automatically sync customer, order and product data from your store. Depending on the number of records you have, you may take up to a few hours for data to be fully synced.
Getting Started with Loyalty
Loyalty is a full-featured loyalty program to help your store retain customers and increase lifetime value.
Guide to Setup Loyalty
Widget Installation
Go to reperks overview page and ensure that reperks widget is Active.
Widgets not Working?
See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix
---
# Coupons Guide
Topic: Reperks | Section: Coupons
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319770972/coupons-guide
Auto-Generated Coupons
For supported ecommerce platforms, Reperks will automatically generate coupon codes. See list of ecommerce platforms that supports auto-generated coupons.
How are coupons auto-generated?
When deal or reward is created, reperks will automatically generate coupons based on batch size from merchant settings. Default batch size is 3. So we'll pre-generate 3 coupon codes from ecommerce platform that customers can redeem.
Why pre-generate coupon codes? This is to ensure the redemption process is swift for customers instead of trying to generate coupon codes on-the-fly.
When available coupon codes goes below min queue size, reperks automatically generate another batch of coupon codes.
Coupon Expiry (Optional)
For auto-generated coupons, you can also specify an optional expiry value. This is the number of days coupon expires after is has been redeemed. Keep in mind that pre-generated coupon codes will be created without any expiration. Our system will automatically update coupon with expiration after is has been redeemed by customer.
Manually Add Coupons
If the platform that you're using doesn't support auto-generated coupons, you would need to manually add coupons for reward.
See how to manually add coupons
---
# How to manually add coupons?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Coupons
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319219919/how-to-manually-add-coupons
If your ecommerce platform doesn't support auto-generated coupons, you would need to manually add coupons for reward.
Keep in mind that manually adding coupons in Reperks will not auto-generate coupons on ecommerce platform. You need to manually create the coupons by yourself within your ecommerce platform.
Coupons Usage Type
First, you need to first decide whether you want to add one-time coupon or ongoing coupon.
One-time coupon - Can only be used once. If you choose to use this, you should have a dynamic way to bulk generate coupon codes from your ecommerce platform.
Ongoing coupon - Coupon can be reused multiple times. Use this if there are no reliable ways for you to bulk generate coupon codes from ecommerce platform. Advantage of using this is that you won't run out of available coupons.
What happens if one-time coupon runs out?
If you're only using one-time coupon, you may run out of available coupons. When coupon runs out, reward will be inactive until there's available coupons.
Generate Coupons Codes from Ecommerce Platform
Next, you need to generate and prepare coupon codes from ecommerce platform. If you are bulk generating coupon codes, export them to a CSV file withcode column.
Adding Coupons
To add coupons, go to store rewards page. Then click View Coupons for reward.
Next, you can either add a single coupon or upload coupons via CSV. Adding single coupon is pretty straightforward so we'll skip that and elaborate more on uploading coupons.
For uploading coupon, you will need to provide us with a CSV file withcode column specified. From there you can choose to bulk add/delete coupon.
---
# List of ecommerce platforms that supports auto-generated coupons
Topic: Reperks | Section: Coupons
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318917593/list-of-ecommerce-platforms-that-supports-auto-generated-coupons
Below is a list of ecommerce platforms that supports auto-generated coupons.
Shopify
BigCommerce
Wix
If you are not using any of the above platforms, you would need to manually add coupons for reward.
---
# Loyalty Setup Guide
Topic: Reperks | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319788049/loyalty-setup-guide
Follow guide below to setup loyalty program after you've installed Reperks app.
Customers Synced as Reperks Members
Customers will be automatically synced as members for reperks program. Keep in mind that members can't be manually added via OnVoard. They need to be customers from your store. This is because they need to login to your store in order to view points.
If there's a need to manually add a new member, add them as customer in your store and it will be automatically synced as a reperks member.
Setup Earning Points
To get members to participate in your reperks program, you need to first configure rules for members to earn points. Go to earning points page and add rule.
Guide to Setup Earning Points
Setup Store Rewards
Add store rewards so that members can use their points to redeem for rewards. To setup, go to store rewards page and add reward.
Guide to Setup Store Rewards
For supported ecommerce platforms, Reperks will automatically generate coupon codes for each reward. See list of ecommerce platforms that supports auto-generated coupons. If the platform that you're using doesn't support auto-generated coupons, you would need to manually add coupons for reward.
See Coupons Guide
Setup Reperks Emails
By default, we will auto provision an email profile using your store credentials.
Go to email profiles page.
If email profile if not created, follow this guide to setup email profile.
For better deliverability, we recommend setting up email domain as well.
Next go edit reperks emails and customize emails based on your preference.
Customize Reperks Widget
Next, you can customize reperks widget that will be shown on your site.
Go edit reperks widget and customize it based on your preference.
Migrate or set initial points for members
To migrate or set initial points for members, you can import existing members data via csv.
---
# Deep Linking Guide
Topic: Reperks | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318936508/deep-linking-guide
There are 2 ways you can use links to launch reperks widget.
Using URL Hash
You can use the following url hash to launch reperks widget. One common approach is to add a nav link for "Rewards" and use URL hash to launch widget when user clicks on it.
#ov-reperks-home
#ov-reperks-store-rewards
#ov-reperks-earning-points
#ov-reperks-activities
Each of the hash will navigate to it respective tab. For example, #ov-reperks-activities will open widget and navigate to activities tab.
Using URL Parameter
Alternatively, you can use url parameter ov-reperks-link to launch reperks widget.
https://example.com?ov-reperks-link=home
https://example.com?ov-reperks-link=store-rewards
https://example.com?ov-reperks-link=earning-points
https://example.com?ov-reperks-link=activities
Different between using URL Hash VS URL Parameter
The key difference between using url hash and url parameter is that if a user clicks on hash link, the page won't be reloaded. So if you're using a nav link to launch widget, stick to URL hash for better usability.
---
# How should I structure my points program?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318760146/how-should-i-structure-my-points-program
Keep your points system as simple as possible. Make it easy for user to quantify how much their points are worth so they can understand the value of it.
Earn 1 point for every $1 spent
For place order, opt to use 1-to-1 points system. This way, customer can easily know how much points they can earn from their purchase. This is important because say if a customer "aims" to unlock a reward but lacks points, they can easily deduce how much purchase they need to make in order to make-up for required points.
At the same time, it also allows customers to easily know how much each reward is worth. For example, if you have a $10 off coupon that requires 500 Points. Customer can easily deduce that spending $500 gives them $10 off their next purchase.
Many retailers like Starbucks who've previously used uneven points system (2 Points for $1 Spent) have now switched to a 1-to-1 points system.
---
# Reperks Widget Javascript API
Topic: Reperks | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318748876/reperks-widget-javascript-api
Initialize OnVoard object
Specify the following snippet once before you add any javascript API code so that OnVoard object is initialized.
Below are available methods for javascript API.
Show PanelUse this to show reperks panel.
OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'showPanel');
Show panel and navigating to specific tabs.
OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'showPanel', 'store-rewards');OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'showPanel', 'earning-points');OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'showPanel', 'activities');
Hide PanelUse this to hide reperks panel.
OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'hidePanel');
On Ready EventExecute a callback function when reperks widget is loaded and ready.
const yourCallback = () => { console.log("Reperks widget is ready");};OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'onReady', yourCallback);
Get Member Data
Retrieve member data.
const yourCallback = (memberData) => { console.log(memberData);};OnVoard('reperks_widget', 'getMemberData', yourCallback);
Below is a sample for member data. External ID refers to customer's ID in ecommerce platform.
{"id": "1111","external_id": "1111","contact_id": "1111","contact_email": "john@example.com","current_points": 2500,"is_enrolled": true,"dob": "1988-04-08T15:14:30.000Z"}
---
# How to show Reperks Widget in home page only?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_7993431379124/how-to-show-reperks-widget-in-home-page-only
Use URL filters with the following regex^https?:\/\/[^\/\s]+(?:\/)?$
---
# Migrating from another loyalty program
Topic: Reperks | Section: Migrating
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319610870/migrating-from-another-loyalty-program
If you are migrating to Reperks from another rewards platform, you might want to import existing members data. See guide below on how you can do that.
Import Existing Members Data via CSV
---
# Import Existing Members Data via CSV
Topic: Reperks | Section: Migrating
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319289413/import-existing-members-data-via-csv
If you are migrating from another rewards program, you might want to import existing members data into OnVoard via CSV. Before you BeginEnsure that you have installed Reperks app and data have been fully imported into OnVoard.Members must be imported into OnVoard before you can update points via import. Import will only update details for existing member. It will not create new member. CSV RequirementsMust use comma (,) as delimiter.Must use double quotes (") as quote char. CSV Template (Optional)For starters, you can use this csv template to prepare your import. This template only serves as a guide. Our system is flexible and can handle CSV files with any column names since data can be mapped later on. Import JobGo to imports job page and add a new import job.Select Reperks Members for Data Type and attach csv file for import.On next step, specify field mappings and other configurations for import. Below are the available fields. FieldDescriptionExampleRequiredEmailEmail for member. This is a required field. It will be used as matching key for member.john@example.comYesPointsNumber of points for member. Will set to this number.100NoDate of BirthMember's date of birth. Preferably in ISO 8601 format.1995-04-25NoCreated DatetimeDatetime member joined program in ISO 8601 format. By default, our system will auto generate member's created_datetime based on the time member is synced into our system. This however, may be inaccurate if you're migrating from an another rewards program. Having the right created_datetime helps in ensuring the that points are expired more accurately (if you are using points expiration).2020-02-01T21:11:51.205173-11:00No Email must be mapped. It will be used as matching key for reperks member.Member must already exists before we can import details. Import will not create new member.
---
# How to migrate or set initial points?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Migrating
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318975835/how-to-migrate-or-set-initial-points
To migrate or set initial points, you can import existing members data via csv. Basically you need to create a CSV with email and points column. Then import them to set members to points.
---
# Earning Points Setup Guide
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319670114/earning-points-setup-guide
To get members to participate in your reperks program, you need to first configure rules for members to earn points. Go to earning points page and add rule. Below are available options members can earn points.
Standard Rules
Place an Order - Give points when user place an order.
Create an Account - Give points when user create an account.
Submit Reviews - Give points when user submit reviews.
Upcoming Birthday - Give points for user's upcoming birthday. To prevent abuse, our system will automatically skip users who've already been awarded points for birthday within the same calendar year.
Social Rules
Facebook Like - Give points when user like your facebook page.
Facebook Share - Give points for sharing links on facebook.
Instagram Follow - Give points when user follow on instagram.
Twitter Follow - Give points when user follow on twitter.
TikTok Follow - Give points when user follow on tiktok.
For social rules, points will be awarded when user click on button to open link. This is because social networks doesn't provide us access to detect likes/follows/shares. Thus social rules are awarded based on the assumption that users will click through link and perform action.
Advanced Rules
Go to Link - Give points when user go to specified link. The way it works is similar to social rule type. For example, "Youtube Subscribe" by linking to your youtube channel and asking users to subscribe in exchange for points. See guide for go to link rule.
Contact Activity - Give points based on contact activity. This is an advanced rule that allows you to create campaigns based on conditions. For example, give 100 points if customer purchase specific products in August. See guide for contact activity rule.
Conditions
You can also specify optional conditions for earn points eligibility. For example, give points only when contact has lifetime spent of at least $100.
Campaigns
Beyond typical earn points rules, Reperks also allows you to boost store engagement with campaigns like "For X month, give additional X points when customer spent more than $X". For more, see campaigns guides below.
Seasonal Campaigns
Product Campaigns
View All Campaigns
---
# Rule Guide: Submit Reviews
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319285825/rule-guide-submit-reviews
This rule allows you to give points when user submit reviews via OnVoard's Reviews app. Keep in mind that it only works with OnVoard's reviews app, and is not integrated other reviews apps.
How does it work?
Points will be awarded for each time reviews are submitted. If user reviews 5 products within a single submission it will count as once. If user provides multiple reviews submission, they will earn points for each submission.
How to prevent fraudulent submission?
Use Earning Limit to cap the number the times user can earn points from this rule within a time period. In this our above config, user can earn points 1 time every 7 days.
Other Examples
Add expiry time to earn points for reviews submit
You can use Conditions to add expiry time for users to earn points. In the above config, we are using Order Placed activity. The example shows order placed activity for Shopify but is also applicable for other ecommerce platforms).
In this case, user will earn points if they submit a review within 30 days after an order has been placed. Remember to add more buffer for expiry days to take into account delivery time for order.
Give bonus points for photo/video reviews
See give bonus points when reviews are submitted with photo/video
---
# Rule Guide: Go to Link
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318982907/rule-guide-go-to-link
Go to Link is an advanced rule that allows you to give points when user go to a specific link.
How to use it?
The way this rule works is similar to social rules like "Facebook Like". Points are awarded when user opens link, instead of performing the "like" action. We recommend using Go to Link to motivate users to promote or follow your brand. Below is an example on how we setup a Youtube Subscribe rule.
After selecting Go to Link rule, specify Youtube Subscribe for name. We'll then use the following configurations.
This is how the rule will render like inside reperks widget.
---
# Rule Guide: Contact Activity
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318756897/rule-guide-contact-activity
Contact Activity is an advanced rule that allows you to give points based on contact's activity. This is an powerful concept that you can use create various campaigns for your reperks program.
How to use it?
In general, the most common way to use contact activity rule is to use it to create seasonal or product campaigns. For example, give additional 100 points when customer spent more than $200 during the month of August. For more, see campaigns you can setup with contact activity.
Seasonal Campaigns
Product Campaigns
View All Campaigns
---
# Give bonus points when reviews are submitted with photo/video
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318515547/give-bonus-points-when-reviews-are-submitted-with-photovideo
You can give bonus points when reviews are submitted with photo/video Below is a sample setup using contact activity rule:
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 100 points for this rule.
For contact activity type, we're using Reviews Submitted.
For conditions, we'll filter for reviews with image or reviews with video.
---
# Give points for each reviewed product
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318418146/give-points-for-each-reviewed-product
Besides giving points for each review submission, you can opt to give points for each reviewed product.
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 50 points for each reviewed product
For contact activity type, select Review Added.
---
# Milestone: Give points for X number of placed orders
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318376054/milestone-give-points-for-x-number-of-placed-orders
You can give points when customer has placed X number of orders. This is considered a milestone campaign.
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Place an Order rule type. Then use the config below.
Select Fixed Points for Earning Type.
We're giving 500 points for this rule.
Turn on earning limit and configure such that member can only earn points from this rule 1 time over all time.
This is an important config because otherwise member will keep earning points for every order placed.
For conditions, filter for contact with Order Placed activity. Ensure they've occurred at least 5 times over all time. We're using Shopify for this example but similar order placed activity is available for other ecommerce platforms as well.
Keep in mind that refunds or cancelled orders will still be counted since we're only taking into account order placed activity.
---
# Place an Order: Configure eligible order statuses to award points
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318395509/place-an-order-configure-eligible-order-statuses-to-award-points
For "place an order" activity to be eligible for earning points, the order has to in the correct status. For instance, you wouldn't want to give points for an invalid or unpaid order.
Configure Eligible/Ineligible Order Statuses
Go to edit merchant settings and look for Order Settings.
These are the eligible/ineligible statuses to reward points. In general, we recommend sticking to the defaults.
Eligible Statuses: Paid
Ineligible Statuses: Refunded, Cancelled
Keep in mind that if an order is partially refunded, we may still mark as it paid.
---
# Place an Order: Do you award points on past orders?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Earning Points
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318384816/place-an-order-do-you-award-points-on-past-orders
No. Place an order activity will only award points for newly placed orders after you've installed our app. If you award points for past orders, you can do so by importing existing points via CSV.
---
# Store Rewards Guide
Topic: Reperks | Section: Rewards
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319732345/store-rewards-guide
Add store rewards so that members can use their points to redeem for rewards. To setup, go to store rewards page and add reward.
Reward Types
Below are available reward types
Keep in mind that depending on your ecommerce platform, not all reward types will be avaialble.
Amount Discount - Give discount in fixed amount.
Percentage Discount - Give discount in percentage of total order value.
Free Shipping - Give free shipping for order.
Free Product - Give free products that customer can redeem.
Coupons for Rewards
For supported ecommerce platforms, Reperks will automatically generate coupon codes for each reward. See list of ecommerce platforms that supports auto-generated coupons. If the platform that you're using doesn't support auto-generated coupons, you would need to manually add coupons for reward.
See Coupons Guide
---
# Seasonal Campaigns
Topic: Reperks | Section: Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319669700/seasonal-campaigns
Use seasonal campaigns to boost revenue for certain periods. Below is a sample setup for contact activity rule:
For month of May 2022, give additional 100 points when customer spent more than $200.
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 100 points for this rule.
For contact activity type, we're using Order Placed. We're using Shopify for this example but similar activity is available for other ecommerce platforms as well.
For conditions, we'll filter for orders with total price of at least $200.
Activity datetime must also be in the month of May 2022.
---
# Product Campaigns
Topic: Reperks | Section: Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319238915/product-campaigns
Use product campaigns to run promotions for certain products. Below is a sample setup for contact activity rule:
For month of May 2022, give additional 100 points when customer purchase any products with name containing "Jacket".
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 100 points for this rule.
For contact activity type, we're using Order Placed. We're using Shopify for this example but similar activity is available for other ecommerce platforms as well.
For conditions, we'll filter for orders with product names containing "Jacket".
Activity datetime must also be in the month of May 2022.
---
# Discount Code Campaigns
Topic: Reperks | Section: Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318954974/discount-code-campaigns
Use discount code campaigns to give points when certain discount code is used. Below is a sample setup for contact activity rule:
For month of May 2022, give additional 100 points when customer placed an order of at least $100 and used discount code "100PLUS".
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 100 points for this rule.
For contact activity type, we're using Order Placed. We're using Shopify for this example but similar activity is available for other ecommerce platforms as well.
For conditions, we'll filter for orders with total price of at least $100.
Activity datetime must also be in the month of May 2022.
Must use discount code 100PLUS in order.
---
# Milestone Campaigns
Topic: Reperks | Section: Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318795891/milestone-campaigns
Use milestone campaigns to give points when customer hit milestones. Below is a sample setup for contact activity rule:
Give 500 points when customer hit $1000 lifetime spent with store.
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 500 points for this rule.
For contact activity type, we're using Order Fulfilled. We're using Shopify for this example but similar activity is available for other ecommerce platforms as well.
We are using order fulfilled activity instead of order placed because contact's total spent is calculated based on fully paid order, which may not be the case when an order has just been placed.
Leave Contact Activity Conditions empty.
Turn on earning limit and configure such that member can only earn points from this rule 1 time over all time.
This is an important config because otherwise member will keep earning points for every order fulfilled.
For conditions, filter for contact with total spent of at least $1000.
---
# Milestone Period Campaigns
Topic: Reperks | Section: Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318515244/milestone-period-campaigns
Use milestone period campaigns to give points when customer hit milestones within a time period. Below is a sample setup for contact activity rule:
Give 200 points when customer hit $300 spent within 90 days window.
To replicate, add earn points rule and select Contact Activity rule type. Then use the config below.
We're giving 200 points for this rule.
For contact activity type, we're using Order Fulfilled. We're using Shopify for this example but similar activity is available for other ecommerce platforms as well.
We are using order fulfilled activity instead of order placed because contact's total spent is calculated based on fully paid order, which may not be the case when an order has just been placed.
Leave Contact Activity Conditions empty.
Turn on earning limit and configure such that member can only earn points from this rule 1 time over all time.
This is an important config because otherwise member will keep earning points for every order fulfilled.
For conditions, filter for contact with last 90 days total spent of at least $300.
---
# Why points not earned for placed order?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Troubleshooting
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319789425/why-points-not-earned-for-placed-order
By default, only Paid orders will be rewarded with points for placed order. You can configure eligible statuses using steps below.
Go to merchant settings page.
Under Order Settings section you can configure eligible statuses to be rewarded with points. Default value is Paid.
Why only give points when order is paid?
This is to prevent exploitation. If you auto give away points to orders that have not been paid, anyone can easily spam unpaid orders to collect points.
---
# How to set points expiry?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Troubleshooting
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319286951/how-to-set-points-expiry
You can configure merchant settings to expire points after certain periods if member didn't engaged with program. Setting points expiry may help to boost engagement rates since customers would need to continuously engage with your store in order to make full use of their points.To set points expiry, go edit merchant settings. Scroll to Points Expiry section and turn it on.Below are configurations for points expiry.Expiry TypeRolling (Default) - Every new points earned resets the expiry timer.For example, let's say expiry days is 365.Customer earns points in JanMakes a purchase in Jun to earn additional pointsExpiry resets to 365 days from Jun.Fixed - Points expire exactly X days after they are earned. Future purchases do not reset the timer.For example, let's say expiry days is 365.Customer earns points in JanThose points always expire 365 days from Jan, even if they purchase again.Days Before ExpireNumber of days before points expire. Must be at least 90. If unsure, we recommend sticking to 365.
---
# Can I use custom icon for reperks?
Topic: Reperks | Section: Troubleshooting
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318548115/can-i-use-custom-icon-for-reperks
Not at the moment. We do intend to support using custom icons for reperks in the future.
---
# Access scopes changes for Reperks app
Topic: Reperks | Section: Troubleshooting
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318347130/access-scopes-changes-for-reperks-app
ShopifyJan 2025read_publications read_product_listings - Required as we migrated to graphql mandatory for Shopify api deprecation.Mar 2026read_all_orders - Changes to graphql endpoint require us to have this access scope. Also use this to be able to attribute historical conversion.
---
# How to exclude customers from reperks program?
Topic: Reperks | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319678144/how-to-exclude-customers-from-reperks-program
There are 3 ways you can exclude customers from reperks program.
Specify Exclusion Tags
You can exclude customers from reperks program by specifying tags. Keep in mind that tags refers to customer tags on ecommerce platform, not contact tags in OnVoard.
To specify exclusion tags, go edit merchant settings.
Locate Customer Settings and specify your exclusion tags.
Update Individual Member Status
Another approach is to go to members page.
Select member status to update and mark it as Excluded.
Bulk Update via CSV
For this approach, you will upload a csv file with email column to bulk update members status to excluded. Go to imports job page and add a new import job.
Select Reperks Members for Data Type and attach csv file for import.
Under Status section, select Excluded. Next, you can import to bulk update.
---
# How to open reperks widget using link?
Topic: Reperks | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318531588/how-to-open-reperks-widget-using-link
You can use url hash or querystring to open reperks widget using link. For example
https://example.com#ov-reperks-homehttps://example.com?ov-reperks-link=home
For more see Deep Linking Guide
---
# Do you support VIP tiers?
Topic: Reperks | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318428307/do-you-support-vip-tiers
Currently we do not support VIP tiers.
---
# How does member redeem reward?
Topic: Reperks | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318348374/how-does-member-redeem-reward
See walkthrough below on how does member redeem reward.
---
# How to use your site's font for reperks widget
Topic: Reperks | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318391536/how-to-use-your-sites-font-for-reperks-widget
To use your site's font for reperks widget, go edit reperks widget.
Then add the following scripts under Custom CSS.
.ov-app-reperks-widget { font-family: inherit !important;}
---
# Setting up Product Recommender
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319536974/setting-up-product-recommender
Most users visit an online store without knowing what they want to buy beforehand. With product recommendations, you can suggests, guide, and convert these users into customers.
For users that are already buying, product recommendations can help you boost average order value (AOV) with cross-sell recommendations like "Frequently Bought Together" and "Customers Who Bought This Also Bought".
See in-depth setup instructions for based on your ecommerce platform:
Install Product Recommender on Shopify
Install Product Recommender on BigCommerce
Install Product Recommender on EasyStore
Install Product Recommender on Shopline
Install Product Recommender on Wix
Manually Install Product Recommender
---
# Manually install recommender snippet with custom placement
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319199762/manually-install-recommender-snippet-with-custom-placement
In some cases, you may prefer to use custom placement to manually install recommender snippet on specific location. Here's a quick walkthrough.
From recommenders page, select recommender to edit. Locate Settings > Placement and select Custom Placement. Then save changes.
After that, click Show Code to get widget snippet. Snippet should look something like this:
Paste snippet to your desired placement.
---
# Using Fallback Recommenders
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319546057/using-fallback-recommenders
You can setup fallback recommenders to be shown when the primary recommender doesn't have any recommendations. One common example is to use Similar Items as fallback for Frequently Bought Together and Also Bought recommendations since not all products will have sufficient purchase history.
Setting up Fallback Recommender
Go to recommenders page and add a new recommender.
Filter by Fallback to get eligible logics for fallback recommender.
Click Build Recommender to continue.
Select Fallback for view.
Customize the rest of configurations according to your preference and save recommender.
Assign Fallback Recommender
Once created, you can assign fallback recommender.
Go to recommenders page click Fallback button for recommender and specify fallback.
Once that is done, we will automatically serve fallback recommender is the primary recommender doesn't have any recommendations.
---
# Filter products from recommendations
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319537701/filter-products-from-recommendations
You can setup global filters and recommender filters to exclude products from recommendations based on their properties.
Global Filters
Go to recommender settings page to specify global filters. The following filters are supported on global level.
Minimum Rating
Does not contain tags
Recommender Filters
Go to recommenders page and select recommender to edit. Then go to Filters tab and Enable Additional
Filters.
Recently Viewed
Unlike other recommendations, recently viewed recommendations will not be filtered.
---
# Conversions tracking for recommenders
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319133119/conversions-tracking-for-recommenders
In general, treat conversion stats for recommenders as a reference and not dwell too much into absolute numbers. Every product recommendations vendors use a different methodology to calculate conversion stats so you should never choose vendors solely based on conversion stats. Some treat viewed recommendation as attributable conversion while others don't count refunds as conversions.
Below we shall illustrate how OnVoard does conversions tracking for recommenders.
Conversions are treated as Assisted Conversions
A conversion occurs when someone makes an order after clicking on product recommendations. We don't take full credit for the conversion. Instead, we think that product recommendations assisted in getting the conversion.
7 days lookback window
Only recommendations clicks within the last 7 days will count towards conversions.
Double counting can occur for assisted conversions
For example, a single converted product may generate more than 1 assisted conversion if 2 recommender widget is clicked by user to view that product before it gets converted. In this case, both recommenders will show assisted conversion.
Why we don't use last-click attribution
Many merchants use more than 1 recommender widgets. Some recommendations, like Recently Viewed, may be clicked more frequently by users before they make the final purchase. Using last-click attribution will cause these widgets to gain too much attribution while losing insights for other widgets that have contributed to purchase. This is why we use double counting to track assisted conversions.
Conversions are recorded at product-level
Each converted product will count as 1 conversion. Thus, if an order have 5 products, you may have up to 5 conversions for that order. Products that are not clicked from recommendations will not be recorded as conversions.
Subsequent changes to order will not modify conversions
Refunds and cancelled orders will still be counted as conversions.
---
# Sort multiple recommender widgets on the same placement
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318831840/sort-multiple-recommender-widgets-on-the-same-placement
When displaying multiple recommender widgets on the same placement, you may need to sort these widgets based on specific order. For example, a common pattern is to display Recently Viewed recommendations at the bottom of page just before footer.
Sort Order
To customize sorting order, go to recommenders page and edit your recommender.
Look for Styles > Other Config > Sort Order and modify it. Widgets will be rendered in sorted ascending order. Thus, a widget with sort order 1 will be placed above widget with sort order 3.
---
# Add text link in product recommendations
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318685230/add-text-link-in-product-recommendations
In some cases, you may want to add a text link to collection page in rendered product recommendations.
Example taken from Amazon.com
Recommendations Header
For that, go to recommenders page and select recommender to edit. Then edit header from Styles > Header to include link.
---
# Product Recommender Javascript API
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318583543/product-recommender-javascript-api
Initialize OnVoard object
Specify the following snippet once before you add any javascript API code so that OnVoard object is initialized.
On Recommendation Rendered EventExecute a callback function when recommendation is rendered. This can be used to execute currency reconvert method to convert product prices to active currency.
const callback= () => { Currency.convertAll();};OnVoard('recommender', 'onRecommendationRendered', callback);
---
# Frequently Bought Together
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319530149/frequently-bought-together
Before you use this logicKeep in mind that this logic may not always have recommendations for every products. This means that if a product is new or doesn't have another frequently purchased together products, there won't be recommendations for that product. If you still want to display recommendations for the product, you can use a fallback recommender.Use frequently bought together to upsell commonly bought together products. This logic will look through your store's orders and identify products that are commonly purchased together. The algorithm used to implement this is association rules. Model Update Interval1 dayCan Manually Update ModelNoCan Preview OutputNoRecommendations Build TimeExpect to wait for a few minutes. RequirementsProduct combinations (A -> B) must be purchased together for at least once.Lift must be at least 1. This means that users are at least 1X more likely to buy product B together with product A. Where should you place this recommendation?Product PageDue to it's high relevance, we recommend placing this recommendation in product page above all other product recommendations.Cart PageIf this logic is used on cart page, we will find product recommendations based on your cart items. If cart is empty, there won't be any product recommendations.
---
# Also Bought
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319143947/also-bought
Before you use this logicKeep in mind that this logic may not always have recommendations for every products. This means that if a product is new or doesn't have another frequently purchased together products, there won't be recommendations for that product. If you still want to display recommendations for the product, you can use a fallback recommender.Also known as Customers Who Bought This Also Bought. Use this to cross-sell other products bought by customers. This algorithm looks at purchase history of customers who've purchased a given product. Then recommend other products based on their purchase history. Results will be similar to Frequently Bought Together if most of your customers are one-time purchasers. The algorithm used to implement this is association rules. Model Update Interval1 dayCan Manually Update ModelNoCan Preview OutputNoRecommendations Build TimeExpect to wait for a few minutes. RequirementsProduct combinations (A -> B) must be purchased for at least once.Lift must be at least 1. This means that users are at least 1X more likely to buy product B if they've purchased product A. Where should you place this recommendation?Product PageDue to it's high relevance, we recommend placing this recommendation in product page above all other product recommendations.Cart PageIf this logic is used on cart page, we will find product recommendations based on your cart items. If cart is empty, there won't be any product recommendations.
---
# Difference between Frequently Bought Together and Also Bought
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318864461/difference-between-frequently-bought-together-and-also-bought
Frequently Bought TogetherFinds products that are commonly purchased together within a single order.For example, Macbook is frequently bought together with a laptop case. Also BoughtLooks at purchase history of customers who've purchased a given product. Recommend other products purchased by customers based on their purchase history.For example, customers who have purchased Macbook are likely to purchase MacOs software and Macbook accessories in the future.Products recommended from Frequently Bought Together will be a subset of Also Bought. Both methods suffer from cold start problems for new products. As such, consider falling back to Similar Items product recommendations for new products until there's sufficient purchase data. See guide on using fallback recommenders.
---
# Similar Items
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318669941/similar-items
Recommend similar products based on textual attributes like title, description, keywords. The pros of this algorithm is that it does not require any past purchase data (aka cold start problem). Implemented with tf–idf.
Model Update Interval
3 days
Can Manually Update Model
No
Can Preview Output
No
Recommendations Build Time
This model will take some time to build. Depending on the number of products your store have, it may take anywhere from a few minutes to hours.
Requirements
Products must be at least 10% similar.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Product Page
Since this recommendation model doesn't require any past purchase data, you can use it as fallback for newly added products that wouldn't have any "Frequently Bought Together" and "Also Bought" recommendations. See guide on using fallback recommenders.
---
# Recently Viewed
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318539756/recently-viewed
Before you use this logic
Keep in mind that this logic will return empty if there are no previously viewed items. You can consider using a fallback recommender if you want to display other recommendations when it's empty.
Display recently viewed products based on browsing history. This can be used to help users quickly navigate products they've viewed a moment ago. Unlike other logics, recently viewed product recommendations will not be filtered based on conditions.
Model Update Interval
Real-Time
Can Manually Update Model
NA
Can Preview Output
NA
Recommendations Build Time
None
Requirements
Recently viewed uses browser cookie to track viewed products from the last 1 hour. If user uses a different browser or clear their browser cookies, there won't be any recently viewed recommendations.
Where should you place this recommendation?
You can place it on any page of your site. If used, we suggest placing this after all other product recommendations.
---
# Handpicked Items
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318420382/handpicked-items
Manually select products for recommendations. You can use this for various use cases like "Home Decor Under $20", "Recommended for Christmas", "Editors Favorites", "Staff Picks Under $20".
Model Update Interval
8 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Collection Page
Cart Page
---
# Best Selling
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318359273/best-selling
Recommend best selling products by revenue.
Model Update Interval
8 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be ordered at least once based on specified lookback window.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Other Ways to use this recommendation
Best Selling within Time Period
Specify lookback days to get best selling products within a time period. For example, Best Selling (Last 30 Days).
Best Selling within Category
Specify tags filtering to get best selling products from a category. For example, Best Selling (Shoes).
---
# Trending
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318372466/trending
Recommend trending products. Uses number of units sold to determine trending products. More recent sales will hold greater weightage.
Model Update Interval
8 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be ordered at least once based on specified lookback window.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Other Ways to use this recommendation
Trending within Category
Specify tags filtering to get trending products from a category. For example, Trending (Shoes).
---
# Selling Fast
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318347690/selling-fast
Recommend products that are selling fast based on the number of units sold. Unlike trending, selling fast allows you to display the number of product units sold during period. Use trending if you don't wish to display this stat publicly.
Model Update Interval
8 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be ordered at least once based on specified lookback window.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Other Ways to use this recommendation
Selling Fast within Category
Specify tags filtering to get trending products from a category. For example, Selling Fast (Shoes).
---
# Selling Out Soon
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318224742/selling-out-soon
Recommend products that are low in stock. Display selling out soon to induce FOMO and get users to make quick purchase.
Model Update Interval
8 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Will filter product recommendations based on specified max inventory quantity.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
---
# New Arrivals
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318244295/new-arrivals
Recommend newly arrived products. Place new arrivals in your home page to drive that initial boost for new products.
Model Update Interval
4 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be created within specified lookback window.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Collection Page
Other Ways to use this recommendation
New Arrivals within Category
Specify tags filtering to get newly arrived products from a category. For example, New Arrivals (Shoes).
---
# Discounted Items
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318261854/discounted-items
Recommend discounted items. Use discounted items to capture user attention and increase the time they spent at your store.
Model Update Interval
8 hours
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be discounted.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Collection Page
Cart Page
Other Ways to use this recommendation
Over X% Off
Specify minimum discount percentage to display heavily discounted items. For example, Over 40% Off
Discounted within Category
Specify tags filtering to get discounted products from a category. For example, Discounted Shoes.
---
# Top Rated
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318265425/top-rated
Recommend top rated products. Add filter to exclude products with low number of reviews to make recommendations more compelling. The algorithm used is bayesian average, similar to the one used by imdb.com where a 4.8 rated product with 100 reviews would be ranked higher than a 5.0 rated product with 1 review
Model Update Interval
1 Day
Can Manually Update Model
Yes
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be have at least 1 published review.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Collection Page
Other Ways to use this recommendation
Selling Fast within Category
Specify tags filtering to get top rated products from a category. For example, Top Rated Shoes.
---
# Recently Sold
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318281338/recently-sold
Recommend recently sold products. Use recently sold products as an alternative for trending products.
Model Update Interval
Real-Time
Can Manually Update Model
No
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be sold within specified lookback window.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Collection Page
---
# Recently Reviewed
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Logic
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318245118/recently-reviewed
Recommend recently reviewed products. Use recently reviewed products as an alternative for trending products.
Model Update Interval
Real-Time
Can Manually Update Model
No
Can Preview Output
Yes
Recommendations Build Time
Less than 1 minute
Requirements
Product must be reviewed within specified lookback window.
Where should you place this recommendation?
Home Page
Collection Page
---
# How often does OnVoard update recommendations model?
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319522775/how-often-does-onvoard-update-recommendations-model
OnVoard will automatically update recommendations model periodically. Once recommendations model is updated, product recommendations will be cached in memory so that it can be served at fastest speed for your storefront.
You can trigger manual updates for some logics like "Best Selling" and "Selling Out Soon" to get up-to-date recommendations. Each logic will have different update intervals. In general, logics that are more computationally intensive will have longer update interval.
Logic
Update Interval
Can Update Manually
Frequently Bought Together
1 day
No
Also Bought
1 day
No
Similar Items
3 days
No
Recently Viewed
Real-Time
NA
Handpicked Items
8 hours
Yes
Best Selling
8 hours
Yes
Trending
8 hours
Yes
Selling Fast
8 hours
Yes
Selling Out Soon
8 hours
Yes
New Arrivals
4 hours
Yes
Discounted Items
8 hours
Yes
Top Rated
1 day
Yes
Recently Sold
Real-Time
NA
Recently Reviewed
Real-Time
NA
---
# How are stats calculated for recommender?
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319121970/how-are-stats-calculated-for-recommender
Impressions and clicks will be counted as it is. We do not deduplicate impressions and clicks.
Stats shown in console are updated every hour.
For conversions, you can view full details on conversions tracking.
---
# How often do recommender stats update?
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318878052/how-often-do-recommender-stats-update
Product recommender stats and analytics are updated every hour. Thus, you should take into account that there is at least an hour delay in shown stats.
---
# Difference between OnVoard Product Recommender and recommendations provided by ecommerce platform
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318628920/difference-between-onvoard-product-recommender-and-recommendations-provided-by-ecommerce-platform
By default, most ecommerce platform will provide a generic recommendation option for merchants. Below are key reasons why you would want to fork out additional costs and use OnVoard Product Recommender.
14 types of recommendations
We provide 14 types of recommendation logics like Frequently Bought Together, Recently Viewed, Best Selling, Top Rated, Recently Sold etc.
Recommendations possibilities you can generate goes beyond what you can get from recommendations provided by ecommerce platform. Some examples are
Best Selling (Last 30 Days)
Best Selling (Shoes)
Selling Fast (Shoes)
Top Rated (Shoes)
Over 40% Off
Multiple Pages
Add product recommendations to multiple pages and placements like home, collection, cart, product, and other pages at your store.
Social Proofs
Product Ratings
Display product ratings to make recommendations more compelling.
Meta Labels
Display meta labels to make recommendations more informative. For example, display 3 units left for Selling Out Soon recommendations.
Style Editor
Use our style editor to easily customize how recommendations look without editing any code.
Filtering
You can specify filtering logic to exclude products with low ratings. Other filtering options includes
Minimum Inventory Quantity
Minimum Price
Minimum Num Reviews
Tags
Track conversions and stats
You can also track stats for each recommender to see how they perform. This will help you identify how much revenue our recommenders assisted in.
---
# How OnVoard display product ratings in recommendations
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318519756/how-onvoard-display-product-ratings-in-recommendations
OnVoard uses product reviews data from our Reviews app to display product ratings in recommendations. To display product ratings, you need to:
Install and subscribe to our Reviews app. You can use both apps for free if you subscribe to Marketing Platform Standard Plan ($14.95/mo). For more details, see subscriptions page.
Import existing reviews (if there are any). See guide to import via csv.
Published reviews data will be used to display product ratings in recommendations.
---
# What products won't be shown in recommendations?
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318486128/what-products-wont-be-shown-in-recommendations
Products won't be shown in recommendations if they are:
Unpublished
Out-of-stock
Already recommended by another recommender on the same page. This is designed to avoid recommending the same product more than once on a single page.
Filtered based on specified filter settings.
Recently Viewed
Recently viewed recommendations are exempted from the exclusion rules above and will always showcase product recommendations based on user's browsing history.
---
# Why isn't product information updated?
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318349012/why-isnt-product-information-updated
Below are some reasons why product information isn't updated.
Inactive Connection
Go to connections page and check that connection to your ecommerce platform is active.
Queued Updates
OnVoard uses webhooks to sync product data with your ecommerce platform in real time. In most cases, product information should synced within a minute or so.
However, sometimes we may encounter merchants with large product catalogs sending us > 100,000 product updates at once. Since update logs are handled in first-in-first-out (FIFO) manner, update logs will be queued and handled accordingly. In such cases, product updates may be delayed anywhere from a few minutes to hours.
---
# Access scopes changes for Product Recommender app
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318319040/access-scopes-changes-for-product-recommender-app
Currently there's no access scopes changes for Product Recommender app.
We will update this document if there's any future changes to access scopes.
---
# Install Product Recommender on Shopify
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319431454/install-product-recommender-on-shopify
Install Product Recommender AppShopify merchants can use Product Recommender by installing the app from Shopify app store. Product Recommender Shopify Listing Prerequisite: Syncing Products and Orders DataAfter installing, OnVoard will automatically import your products and orders data in the background. Depending on the number of records, it take anywhere from a few minutes to days for records to be fully imported. If your store have > 100,000 products, import will definitely take more than 1 day. Check Imported ProductsYou can go to products page to view imported products. Initial SetupWhile the records are importing, you can still setup product recommender. For initial setup, we suggest creating Recently Viewed as your first recommender to see how things work. Why Recently Viewed? Recently viewed logic doesn't require orders data to be imported before it can generate meaningful recommendations. Also, recommendations build time for recently viewed is very fast. What happens if recommenders are created before data gets fully synced?Our system will use available records to generate recommendations model and update it periodically. Setup Product RecommenderGo to recommenders page and add a new recommender. Select recommendation logic to use. Keep in mind that selected logic can't be changed later. Select View to display recommendations widget. Once that is done, customize the rest of the styles and config based on your preference and click Submit to create recommender. It may take a few minutes for new recommenders to be installed in your store. Placement OptionsHome Page - Display on home page.Product Page - Display on product page.Collection Page - Display on collection page.Cart Page - Display on view cart page.Other Page - Use this if you want to add recommender widget manually with snippet.Email - Generate product recommendations to use in OnVoard emails. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by email editor.ActionPop - Use recommender in OnVoard ActionPop popup. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by ActionPop app.Fallback - Use recommender as fallback for another recommender. Build Recommendations ModelOur system will automatically build recommendations model for created recommender. Most recommendations model should be completed within a few minutes.Recommender widget will be live when you see green ticks for both Status and Model Status. Install Recommender WidgetTo install recommender widget to your site. Select Show Instructions to view installation instructions. Installation Instructions1) Initialize AppClick on Initialize App button to setup app for your theme. This is a mandatory step, even for manual installation. 2) App Block InstallationUse app block installation if your theme supports Online Store 2.0. For vintage themes, you would need to install manually. If app block installation work, you can skip Manual Installation step. 3) Manual InstallationUse this if you're using vintage theme. Snippet should look something like this:Place snippet where you want recommender widget to be shown. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us. Uninstalling AppSee Uninstallation notes for Shopify users.
---
# Disable default product recommendations provided by Shopify Themes
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319111289/disable-default-product-recommendations-provided-by-shopify-themes
Many Shopify themes will provide default product recommendations for product page. If you are using OnVoard Product Recommender, you may want to disable it. Below is a quick guide on how you can do that.
From Shopify Admin, go to Themes and click Customize for theme to edit.
From top bar, navigate to Product Pages.
Select product recommendations block on the left sidebar. Depending on your theme, it may use a different name like "related products" etc.
Turn it off and then save your theme to update changes.
---
# Supported Shopify currency conversion apps
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318854739/supported-shopify-currency-conversion-apps
By default, recommender is compatible with Shopify's internal multi-currency feature. We'll automatically convert product prices based on selected currency.
On top of that, we also support the following currency conversion apps:
Grizzly Apps: BEST Currency Converter
MLVeda: Auto Currency Switcher
Need to integrate other Shopify currency conversion apps?
In order for us to integrate, we'll need more information from the currency conversion app developers. Thus, we need you to email the developers and get back with us for the following details.
To: Currency Conversion App Developer
- Can you provide us with the Javascript API or method to reconvert all prices on page?
- Our price element follows the general convention of wrapping it like `$75`.
This is required because sometimes currency conversion apps converts prices before our product recommendations gets rendered. By knowing their Javascript API to reconvert, we can execute the conversion after product recommendations has been rendered.
Use callback to reconvert prices
An alternative is to use onRecommendationRendered callback to execute reconvert when recommendation has been rendered.
---
# Uninstalling Product Recommender for Shopify users
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318745145/uninstalling-product-recommender-for-shopify-users
If you're using app blocks for installation our scripts should be automatically removed from your storefront upon app uninstallation. Regardless, we recommend referring to the following uninstallation notes to double confirm scripts have been removed.
Uninstallation notes for Shopify users
---
# Install Product Recommender on BigCommerce
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319590052/install-product-recommender-on-bigcommerce
BigCommerce merchants can use Product Recommender by installing the OnVoard's app from BigCommerce app marketplace. Setup Guide for BigCommerceDemo StoreView demo store to see the widgets live in BigCommerce store. Prerequisite: Syncing Products and Orders DataAfter installing, OnVoard will automatically import your products and orders data in the background. Depending on the number of records, it take anywhere from a few minutes to days for records to be fully imported. If your store have > 100,000 products, import will definitely take more than 1 day. Check Imported ProductsYou can go to products page to view imported products. Initial SetupWhile the records are importing, you can still setup product recommender. For initial setup, we suggest creating Recently Viewed as your first recommender to see how things work. Why Recently Viewed? Recently viewed logic doesn't require orders data to be imported before it can generate meaningful recommendations. Also, recommendations build time for recently viewed is very fast. What happens if recommenders are created before data gets fully synced?Our system will use available records to generate recommendations model and update it periodically. Setup Product RecommenderGo to recommenders page and add a new recommender. Select recommendation logic to use. Keep in mind that selected logic can't be changed later. Locate Settings > View and Placement . Specify view and placement to display recommendations widget. Once that is done, customize the rest of the styles and config based on your preference and click Submit to create recommender. It may take a few minutes for new recommenders to be installed in your store. Placement OptionsHome Page - Display on home page.Product Page - Display on product page.Collection Page - Display on collection page.Cart Page - Display on view cart page.Other Page - Use this if you want to add recommender widget manually with snippet.Add Cart PopupThis is an exclusive spot specially designed for BigCommerce merchants to boost add cart upsell.Display inside the add to cart popup that appears after a shopper adds an item to cart.Email - Generate product recommendations to use in OnVoard emails. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by email editor.ActionPop - Use recommender in OnVoard ActionPop popup. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by ActionPop app.Fallback - Use recommender as fallback for another recommender.Build Recommendations ModelOur system will automatically build recommendations model for created recommender. Most recommendations model should be completed within a few minutes.Recommender widget will be live when you see green ticks for both Status and Model Status. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Product Recommender on EasyStore
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319594326/install-product-recommender-on-easystore
Install Product Recommender AppEasyStore merchants can use Product Recommender by installing the app from EasyStore app store. Product Recommender EasyStore Listing Prerequisite: Syncing Products and Orders DataAfter installing, OnVoard will automatically import your products and orders data in the background. Depending on the number of records, it take anywhere from a few minutes to days for records to be fully imported. If your store have > 100,000 products, import will definitely take more than 1 day. Check Imported ProductsYou can go to products page to view imported products. Initial SetupWhile the records are importing, you can still setup product recommender. For initial setup, we suggest creating Recently Viewed as your first recommender to see how things work. Why Recently Viewed? Recently viewed logic doesn't require orders data to be imported before it can generate meaningful recommendations. Also, recommendations build time for recently viewed is very fast. What happens if recommenders are created before data gets fully synced?Our system will use available records to generate recommendations model and update it periodically. Setup Product RecommenderGo to recommenders page and add a new recommender. Select recommendation logic to use. Keep in mind that selected logic can't be changed later. Locate Settings > View and Placement . Specify view and placement to display recommendations widget. Once that is done, customize the rest of the styles and config based on your preference and click Submit to create recommender. It may take a few minutes for new recommenders to be installed in your store. Placement OptionsHome Page - Display on home page.Product Page - Display on product page.Collection Page - Display on collection page.Cart Page - Display on view cart page.Other Page - Use this if you want to add recommender widget manually with snippet.Email - Generate product recommendations to use in OnVoard emails. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by email editor.ActionPop - Use recommender in OnVoard ActionPop popup. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by ActionPop app.Fallback - Use recommender as fallback for another recommender. Build Recommendations ModelOur system will automatically build recommendations model for created recommender. Most recommendations model should be completed within a few minutes.Recommender widget will be live when you see green ticks for both Status and Model Status. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Disable default product recommendations provided by EasyStore
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319177988/disable-default-product-recommendations-provided-by-easystore
If you are using OnVoard Product Recommender, you may want to disable the default product recommendations provided by EasyStore.
From EasyStore admin, go to product settings page.
Select Off for Recommendation
Click Save to update changes.
---
# Install Product Recommender on Shopline
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319780530/install-product-recommender-on-shopline
Install Product Recommender App
Shopline merchants can use Product Recommender by installing the app from Shopline app store.
Product Recommender Shopline Listing
Prerequisite: Syncing Products and Orders Data
After installing, OnVoard will automatically import your products and orders data in the background. Depending on the number of records, it take anywhere from a few minutes to days for records to be fully imported. If your store have > 100,000 products, import will definitely take more than 1 day.
Check Imported Products
You can go to products page to view imported products.
Initial Setup
While the records are importing, you can still setup product recommender. For initial setup, we suggest creating Recently Viewed as your first recommender to see how things work.
Why Recently Viewed? Recently viewed logic doesn't require orders data to be imported before it can generate meaningful recommendations. Also, recommendations build time for recently viewed is very fast.
What happens if recommenders are created before data gets fully synced?
Our system will use available records to generate recommendations model and update it periodically.
Setup Product Recommender
Go to recommenders page and add a new recommender.
Select recommendation logic to use. Keep in mind that selected logic can't be changed later.
Locate Settings > View and Placement . Specify view and placement to display recommendations widget. Once that is done, customize the rest of the styles and config based on your preference and click Submit to create recommender. It may take a few minutes for new recommenders to be installed in your store.
Build Recommendations Model
Our system will automatically build recommendations model for created recommender. Most recommendations model should be completed within a few minutes.
Recommender widget will be live when you see green ticks for both Status and Model Status.
How to install widget?
1) Go to your Shopline theme and add Product Recommender app block.
2) Specify recommender ID and save the theme. You can get ID from recommenders page.
Need help installing?
If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Install Product Recommender on Wix
Topic: Product Recommender | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319638545/install-product-recommender-on-wix
Wix merchants can use Product Recommender by installing the app from Wix app store. See all our Wix apps.Setup Guide for WixPrerequisite: Syncing Products and Orders DataAfter installing, OnVoard will automatically import your products and orders data in the background. Depending on the number of records, it take anywhere from a few minutes to days for records to be fully imported. If your store have > 100,000 products, import will definitely take more than 1 day. Check Imported ProductsYou can go to products page to view imported products. Initial SetupWhile the records are importing, you can still setup product recommender. For initial setup, we suggest creating Recently Viewed as your first recommender to see how things work. Why Recently Viewed? Recently viewed logic doesn't require orders data to be imported before it can generate meaningful recommendations. Also, recommendations build time for recently viewed is very fast. What happens if recommenders are created before data gets fully synced?Our system will use available records to generate recommendations model and update it periodically. Setup Product RecommenderGo to recommenders page and add a new recommender. Select recommendation logic to use. Keep in mind that selected logic can't be changed later. Locate Settings > View and Placement . Specify view and placement to display recommendations widget. Once that is done, customize the rest of the styles and config based on your preference and click Submit to create recommender. It may take a few minutes for new recommenders to be installed in your store. Placement OptionsHome Page - Display on home page.Product Page - Display on product page.Collection Page - Display on collection page.Cart Page - Display on view cart page.Email - Generate product recommendations to use in OnVoard emails. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by email editor.ActionPop - Use recommender in OnVoard ActionPop popup. Recommender will only be used for generating product recommendations. Styles will be handled by ActionPop app.Fallback - Use recommender as fallback for another recommender. Build Recommendations ModelOur system will automatically build recommendations model for created recommender. Most recommendations model should be completed within a few minutes.Recommender widget will be live when you see green ticks for both Status and Model Status. Widgets not Working?See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Setting up Email Campaign
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319324811/setting-up-email-campaign
Email is the primary marketing channel used to communicate with your customers. You can use it to deliver checkout abandonment follow-up, post-purchase review requests, and also regular newsletters to grow your revenue. Email can be created as broadcast email or workflow email. Broadcast email is used for one-time delivery while workflow email is used in marketing automation and delivered via workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you have created at least 1 email profile. If not, see this guide on how you can add new email profile.
Ensure that you have connected to your ecommerce store. Contact us and provide us with your store URL if the ecommerce platform that you are using isn't supported.
Setting up Broadcast Email
Go to broadcast emails page and add a new email. There will be multiple preset email templates to start with. Pick the one most suitable for your use case or select Blank template if you prefer to start from stretch.
Setting up Workflow Email
For workflow emails, you need to first create workflow before adding emails to it. Workflow emails must be attach to a workflow.
Resources
Resources determines variables you can use in your email. For example, {{ contact.first_name
}} will output contact's first name. By default, all emails will have access to the following resources:
Contact
Email
Email Profile
Email Recipient
Workflow emails will have additional resources based on workflow trigger. See guide on using resource in email.
Using Resources in Email
UTM Tracking
UTM Tracking can be turned on to append utm parameters to email links. This allows you to pass traffic source data to Google Analytics.
UTM parameter key must always begin with utm_
You can use variables for parameter value. For example, {{ email.name }} to get email name.
---
# Using Resources in Email
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319095586/using-resources-in-email
Resources are similar to macros.
It determines data variables you can use in your email.
For example, you can use {{ contact.first_name }} to render contact's first name.
You can attach multiple resources to an email.
For workflow emails, we will automatically pass resources data from workflow to email.
See list of resources available for your account.
By default, all emails will have access to the following resources:
Contact
Email
Email Profile
Email Recipient
Workflow Resources
For workflow emails, we will automatically attach additional resources based on selected trigger. For example, the following resources will be attached for low stock email.
Low Stock Notification
Product
Associations
OnVoard allows you to access values from associated resource. For example, you may want to display total_spent for Shopify customer.
To do that, you can add Shopify Customer association for Contact resource. Once association is added, you can access total_spent with {{ contact.shopify_customer.total_spent
}}
---
# Sending Email to Contacts
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318725011/sending-email-to-contacts
There are 2 ways you can send email to your contacts.
Broadcast
One-time broadcast to deliver email to your contacts.
Suitable for static email content.
Can't pass additional resources data when sending.
Manually created and scheduled
Examples: Monthly Newsletters, Announcements, Festive Promotions.
See how you can use broadcast to send emails.
Workflow
Automated workflow to send email to contact based on triggers and conditions.
Suitable for dynamic email content.
Will pass resources data from workflow when sending.
Fully automated and event-driven
Examples: Checkout Abandonment, Browse Abandonment, Product Review, Post-Purchase Feedback
---
# Using Broadcast to Send Emails
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318592091/using-broadcast-to-send-emails
You can use broadcast to send one-time email to contacts from specific lists, tags or segments. Broadcast will only send to active contacts.
Use Cases for Email Broadcast
Monthly Newsletters
Announcements
Festive Promotions (Black Friday/Cyber Monday)
Before you begin
Ensure that you have an active broadcast email created.
Broadcast Email
Go to broadcast emails page and select email you want to broadcast. Broadcast option will only be shown for broadcast emails. It won't be available for workflow emails.
Specify when you want to broadcast, you can send now or schedule a date and time to send later.
Specify contacts to target for this broadcast.
Once submitted, go to broadcasts page to view your broadcast. Broadcast number will be automatically generated to help you uniquely identify each broadcast.
If need to, you can also cancel sending for a broadcast in Sending or Scheduled state.
---
# Email Recipient Statuses
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318470866/email-recipient-statuses
Below are details for email recipient statuses
Sending: Currently sending email to recipient.
Delivered: Email has been accepted by recipient's email server.
Skipped: Will skip sending email to recipient. This happens when you are sending an email to a non-sendable contact.
Failed: Encountered error when trying to send email to recipient. This can happen for various reasons.
Bounced recipient
Inactive email campaign
Exceeding free sending limits if you are on free plan
You should look into recipients' logs if you encounter a high number of sending failures. Keep in mind that sending may be temporarily disabled if our system detects high volume of sending failures.
---
# Email Reporting
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Campaigns
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318337080/email-reporting
To view reporting for your email, go to emails page and select View Recipients for email you want to view reporting.
On recipients page, you can see tab options for:
Recipients
Analytics
Conversions
Select Analytics to view overall stats for email.
On analytics page, you can view the following stats for email.
Total Sents: Total number of email sents. This is the accumulated total for delivered, skipped and failed emails.
Revenue: Revenue generated from this email.
Delivery Rate: Percentage of delivered emails over sents. Actual number of delivered emails will also be shown for this stat.
Skip Rate: Percentage of skipped email deliveries over sents. Actual number of skipped emails will also be shown for this stat.
Failure Rate: Percentage of failed email deliveries over sents. Actual number of failed emails will also be shown for this stat.
Open Rate: Percentage delivered emails that were opened by recipients. Actual number of opened emails will also be shown for this stat.
Click Rate: Percentage delivered emails with link clicked by recipients. Actual number of clicked emails will also be shown for this stat.
Bounce Rate: Percentage of bounced email deliveries over sents. Actual number of bounced emails will also be shown for this stat. Bounced emails are also considered as failed email deliveries.
Marked as Spam Rate: Percentage delivered emails marked as spam by recipients. Actual number of emails marked as spam will also be shown for this stat.
Unsubscribe Rate: Percentage delivered emails that were unsubscribed by recipients. Actual number of unsubscribed emails will also be shown for this stat.
Num Conversion: Number of valid placed orders from email.
Avg Conversion Value: Average basket value from email conversions.
Revenue per Delivered Recipient: Total revenue over number of delivered emails.
---
# How to Setup Email Profile?
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Profiles
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319375282/how-to-setup-email-profile
One of the first thing to do when setting up your OnVoard account is to setup email profiles. At least 1 email profile is required before you can start sending emails. Setting up Email ProfileGo to email profiles page and add a new profile. After adding, we will send a verification email to ensure that you have access to added email address. By default, we will send your emails from onvoard-mail.com domain using OnVoard's Amazon SES account. To have more control over email deliverability, we highly recommend using your own domain for sending. Delivering via your own domain ensures that you can build up email reputation for your own domain. This is better for your business in the long run since you have better control over deliverability. Emails sent from your own domain will not have "via onvoard-mail.com" message. Sending from OnVoard's Domain (default) Sending from your own verified domain Relevant LinksGuide for SMTP Profile
---
# Sending from Free Email Address
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Profiles
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318827132/sending-from-free-email-address
When setting up email profile, it is possible to use an email address from a free email provider, like Gmail, Yahoo, AOL, etc. However, this is something we discourage since:
You can't build sender reputation since you don't control the domain used for sending.
Free email address are generally used for 1-to-1 sending and sending emails in bulk may cause deliverability issues.
How OnVoard helps to improve your deliverability
When you specify a free email address for email profile, OnVoard will automatically generate another email address that will be used for sending.
Free Email Address
OnVoard Generated Email Address
james.diamond@gmail.com
james.diamond+gmail.com@onvoard-mail.com
skittles.shop@aol.com
skittles.shop+aol.com@onvoard-mail.com
razor.clothing@yahoo.com
razor.clothing+yahoo.com@onvoard-mail.com
All generated email address will be using onvoard-mail.com domain. Since this is a domain that we control and passes DMARC check, delivery rates will be much better compared to using free email address for sending. Email replies will be directed to free email address.
---
# Guide for SMTP Profile
Topic: Emails | Section: SMTP Profiles
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319627268/guide-for-smtp-profile
One of the biggest differentiation OnVoard have over other email marketing platforms is the flexibility we provide for SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol). We've are using Amazon SES for default sending.In the past our default choice of delivering emails is via Postmark. But since they got bought over by ActiveCampaign, they've heavily increase their price and we don't use or recommend them anymore.We now deliver emails via Amazon SES by default. Updated: SPF and DMARC Requirements from April 2025Starting April 2025, OnVoard require new sending domains to setup both SPF and DMARC before they can be eligible for sending. All email senders should refer to guide below to ensure they've met the new requirements so that your emails gets delivered to inbox.Learn more about SPF and DMARC Requirement What is a SMTP Profile?SMTP profile determines the SMTP configurations used for delivering and via which domain. OnVoard doesn't do the actual delivery of emails. Instead, we're integrated with SMTP providers like Amazon SES, Sendgrid and Postmark which will do the job for email delivery. By default, emails will be delivered via OnVoard's Amazon SES account. There are other options you can configure to determine how you want your emails to be delivered. For example, via your own domain or even using your own SMTP provider account.How to use SMTP Profile?See link below on how you can use created SMTP profile.How to use SMTP Profile? Sending OptionsIn general, there are 3 kinds of sending options you can configure for SMTP profile. 1) Use onvoard-mail.com (Default)This is the default option provided for all accounts. Emails will be delivered via onvoard-mail.com domain using OnVoard's Amazon SES account. For better control over deliverability, we recommend most users to choose option 2 and use your own domain for sending. Emails sent from your own domain will not have "via onvoard-mail.com" message.Sending from onvoard-mail.com Sending from your own domain 2) Use your own domain (Recommended for most users)This is what we recommend for most users. Delivering via your own domain ensures that you can build up email reputation for your own domain. This is better for your business in the long run since you have better control over deliverability.Your emails will be delivered using OnVoard's Amazon SES account under your own domain.Use your own domain for sending 3) Use your own SMTP provider account (For advanced users)For advanced users, you can even configure to use your own SMTP provider account for sending. Below are the benefits for doing so:You will gain full control over deliverability. For example, you can setup dedicated IP in your SMTP provider account for sending.Save usage charges. OnVoard will charge your email transit usage instead of email sends usage when you use your own SMTP for sending.More in-depth email stats. You can login directly to your SMTP provider account to view raw email stats.Keep in mind that we only recommend this for advanced users who knows what they are doing. For more, you can see the following guides for setting up with own SMTP.Use your own Sendgrid account for sendingUse your own Postmark account for sendingWe are planning to support sending for your own Amazon SES account soon. Sender TypeOnVoard This is the default option. Use OnVoard's SMTP provider account for sending. OnVoard will manage sending IP and deliverability. OnVoard will charge your account email sending usage charges.Own SMTP Use your own SMTP provider account for sending and gain full control over sending IP and deliverability. OnVoard will charge your account email transit usage charges. Available SMTP ProviderCurrently, Amazon SES, Sendgrid and Postmark are the SMTP providers that we support. We have plans to support the following SMTP providers in the future.MailgunSparkPost OnVoard Sender For sending via OnVoard's SMTP provider account, you can use Postmark. This is the default option.Own SMTP Sender If you are sending via your own SMTP provider account, you can use all available options.
---
# Use your own domain for sending
Topic: Emails | Section: SMTP Profiles
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319019596/use-your-own-domain-for-sending
By default, emails will be delivered via onvoard-mail.com domain. We recommend most users to setup and use their own domain email sending.
Delivering via your own domain ensures that you can build up email reputation for your own domain. This is better for your business in the long run since you have better control over deliverability. If you're not familiar with available options, see guide for SMTP profile.
Emails sent from your own domain will not have "via onvoard-mail.com" message.
Sending from onvoard-mail.com
Sending from your own domain
1) Setup SMTP Profile
To use own domain, simply go to smtp profiles page to add a new smtp profile.
Specify domain to use for sending. Email domain should match email address for sending. For example, use onvoard.com if you are sending from support@onvoard.com.
2) Verify DNS Records
Before SMTP profile is eligible for sending, you need to verify DNS records for domain.
Verify DNS Records
3) Using SMTP profile
To use SMTP profile, you can assign it to email profile.
How to use SMTP Profile?
---
# How to use SMTP Profile?
Topic: Emails | Section: SMTP Profiles
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318572133/how-to-use-smtp-profile
To use SMTP profile, you can assign it to specific email profile. Go to email profiles page and select Edit Profile for email profile to assign.Then assign SMTP profile that you've just created.When email profile is used for sending, we will send it based your SMTP config. A few things to note when assigning SMTP profile to email profile.SMTP profile must be live and eligible for sending before it can be assigned.Domain specified in SMTP profile must match email address for sending. For example, use abcstore.com if you are sending from support@abcstore.com. When email profile is used, we will use assigned SMTP profile for sending. If no SMTP profile is assigned, OnVoard will automatically use onvoard-mail.com (OnVoard's Amazon SES Account) , which is the default option.
---
# Product List Block
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Blocks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319322115/product-list-block
You can use product list block to display a list of products in your email. You can use it to display products for abandonment, review request, recommendation emails.
One special trait about OnVoard's product list block is that you can embed reviews stats to provide richer insights for each products.
Product List Configurations
Below are some configurations to note when using product list block.
Selection
Determines how you want to input data to product list block.
ManualManually select products to use
FormulaUse prebuilt formula to select products. You will use this for use cases like abandonment emails. These are the available formulas.
Last Order - Get products from contact's last order. You can use this to display products for review request after each order.
Past Purchases - Get products from contact's past purchases. If you specify 30 for lookback days, we will retrieve products purchased by contact within the last 30 days. Will sort by most recently purchased products.
Abandoned Checkout - Get products from abandoned checkout. There won't be abandoned checkout for contact if their last checkout resulted in a purchase. Web tracking must be turned on.
Added to Cart Products - Get contact's added to cart products. Will sort by most recently added to cart products. You can use this to display products for cart abandonment. Web tracking must be turned on.
Viewed Products - Get contact's viewed products. Will sort by most recently viewed products. You can use this to display products for browse abandonment. Web tracking must be turned on.
RecommendationsGenerate product recommendations with OnVoard Recommender app. See guide for product recommendations in email.
---
# Reviews Block
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Blocks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319022865/reviews-block
You can use reviews block to display reviews for a specific product/site. Embed reviews in email can help boost conversions when you want to recommend a product to your users. In most cases, reviews block will be used along with star rating block to provide reviews insights for a specific product/site.
Example: Cart Abandonment Email
Types of Email to use Reviews Block
Cart Abandonment
Browse Abandonment
Product Recommendations
Cross Sell
---
# Star Rating Block
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Blocks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318721328/star-rating-block
You can use star rating block to display reviews stats for a specific product/site. In most cases, star rating block will be used along with reviews block to provide reviews insights for a specific product/site.
Example: Cart Abandonment Email
Types of Email to use Star Rating Block
Cart Abandonment
Browse Abandonment
Product Recommendations
Cross Sell
---
# Using product list block in review request email
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Blocks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318717660/using-product-list-block-in-review-request-email
You can use product list block to direct users to write reviews for products from their last purchase.
Setup Reviews Collector
First, setup a reviews collector page that will be used for collecting reviews.
After that, go to Settings > Advanced > Reviews Collector of email and specify reviews collector used for generating misc.reviews_collector_url variable. This variable will link users to reviews collector page.
Setup Product List Block
Next, go to email content and drag product list block.
Then make the following adjustments to product list block.
Turn off header for product list block.
Select Last Order for Formula.
For button, update Link URL to {{ misc.reviews_collector_url }} so that we will be directing users to reviews collector page when they click on button.
Change Button Text to Write Review
That's it! Now product list block will display products from contact's last order and direct users to reviews collector page.
---
# Email Sending Rules
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319531540/email-sending-rules
Sending rules helps to prevent overwhelming email sends to contacts so that you won't annoy them with too many emails within a short period of time. Sending rules will only be applied for marketing emails.It will not be applied to emails from other apps like reviews and back-in-stock.
Go to sending rules page to set default sending rules for account. By default, we will skip if same email has been delivered within the last 5 hours (300 minutes).
You can also override skip rules individually for each email.
Skip Same Email
Use this to skip if a user has received the same marketing email within the specified lookback minutes.
Skip Any Email
Use this to skip if a user has received any marketing emails within the specified lookback minutes.
---
# Email Deliverability Guide
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319367450/email-deliverability-guide
Gmail has written a detailed guide regarding email deliverability. We recommend reading it through to understand various best practices for improving email deliverability. For technical stuffs like DKIM, unsubscribing users, ip adresss etc, they are already well handled on our end.
Postmaster Tools
Use postmaster tools to check your domain and IP reputation.
Updated: Sending requirements from Feb 2024
Both Gmail and Yahoo have additional requirements for email senders starting from February 2024.All email senders should refer to guide below to ensure they've met the new requirements so that your emails gets delivered to inbox.
Learn more about Gmail and Yahoo's upcoming sender requirements.
---
# Conversion Tracking for Email Campaigns
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318762749/conversion-tracking-for-email-campaigns
OnVoard uses last touch attribution to automatically track email revenue if you are connected to ecommerce platform.
A conversion is recorded when:
A contact view or click on an email delivered by OnVoard
Purchase from your store later on within specified lookback window
How it works
OnVoard uses connections to ecommerce platforms to retrieve order records. From your store's order records, we identify attributable conversions by matching email addresses with viewed/clicked email activities.
Unlike using pixels to track conversions, this model of conversion tracking works across multiple devices. Let's say John view your email on his phone and makes a purchase later via his laptop, the conversion can still be recorded.
Having cross-device conversion tracking is very useful since most ecommerce purchases come from desktops while most emails are read on phones.
Conversion Settings
The default lookback window to attribute email viewed and clicked actions are 7 days. Go to conversion settings page if you need to modify lookback window.
Discrepancy in Conversions
There may be discrepancies in recorded number of conversions between OnVoard and other tracking platforms. Since most tracking platforms use pixels to track conversions, they may not be able to track conversions recorded on a different device.
OnVoard's method of tracking conversions supports cross-device tracking. However, if the email address used to view email differs from the email address used to make the purchase, we won't be able to recognize the conversion.
Also, different lookback window and attribution models between platforms will cause discrepancies in conversions.
---
# Product recommendations in email
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318763795/product-recommendations-in-email
You can use recommender app to generate and add product recommendations to email for the following logic:
Frequently Bought Together
Also Bought
Similar Items
Best Selling
Handpicked Items
Trending
Selling Fast
Selling Out Soon
New Arrivals
Discounted Items
Top Rated
Recently Sold
Recently Reviewed
Follow steps below to setup recommender.
1) Install Product Recommender
First, you need to install product recommender.
2) Setup Product Recommender
After installation, go to recommenders page and add a new recommender.
Go to Settings > View and select Email . Then save recommender. After created, this recommender will be eligible for Email's product list block.
3) Select Recommender for Email
To use recommender for Email's product list block, pick Recommendations for selection. Then select your recommender to use for generating product recommendations.
Product base recommendation logic
These are logics that generate recommendations base on product inputs.
Frequently Bought Together
Also Bought
Similar Items
There's an additional recommender base config if you are using these logics.
Current Context - Select this to generate recommendations based on current email context. For example, in price drop email, recommendations will be generated for price dropped product.
Contact Activities - Select this to generate recommendations based on products previously purchased or viewed by contact. Use this to generate "You May Be Interested" recommendations.
Meta Label
For product recommendations selection, you will also be presented with an option to display meta label. Turn it on to provide more intuitive recommendations.
---
# Using Double Opt-In
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318575198/using-double-opt-in
Double opt-in can be used to require contacts to confirm they want to receive emails from your business.
Why use double opt-in?
Your lists will have higher engagement and email delivery since users have explicitly confirmed they want to receive emails from you. This means fewer chances of your emails going to spam.
Some regulations like GDPR may require your business to send emails to users who have double opted-in.
Disadvantages of using double opt-in
In general, you can expect to miss out 50% of your subscribers if you use double opt-in. This is due to more steps in the process and some users will forget to confirm the opt-in link.
Double opt-in status
Not Set - This is the default status for double opt-in. Use this to unset opt-in status.
Not Confirmed - Opt-In confirmation email has been delivered but contact has not confirmed it. When contact is in this state, they won't recieve any other emails from you since they have not yet confirmed opt-in subscription. Contact will be classified as non-sendable.
Confirmed - Contact is double opted-in.
Ways to use double opt-in
Below are various ways you can use double opt-in.
Prompt Sync
When using prompt to sync response to OnVoard Contact, you can turn on double opt-in. When turned on, we will send double opt-in confirmation email to contacts who have not confirmed double opt-in.
Manually update double opt-in status
You can also manually update double opt-in status for contact.
Go to contacts page and select Change Opt-In Status for contact.
You can then change double opt-in status.
Bulk update double opt-in status
You can use contacts bulk action to bulk update double opt-in status.
Customizations
Lastly, you can go to email settings to customize both opt-in email and opt-in confirmations page.
---
# Templating language for email
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318343660/templating-language-for-email
OnVoard uses liquid template language to generate email output. For example, you can use {{ contact.first_name }} to render contact's first name. Learn more about liquid template language.
---
# Unusually high email open rates
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318329616/unusually-high-email-open-rates
The average open rates for emails are around 20%. If you encountered drastically high email open rates, it may be caused by spam filters opening your emails before they reached the recipients' inbox.
In order to protect their users from malicious content, inbox providers like Gmail and Outlook use spam filters to open and check content from "untrusted senders". This normally happens when you just started sending emails from a domain without much sender reputation.
Identify Spam Filters Opening Emails
The simplest way to identify if an email is opened by spam filters is to look at the time difference between email delivered and opened. If the time difference is seconds apart, you can assume that email is opened by spam filter instead of actual user.
By default, OnVoard will try to detect opens/clicks from spam filters. We do this by automatically exclude opens/clicks that happen within 30 seconds after the email was delivered.
OnVoard is not using user agent to detect opens from spam filters since Gmail serves pixel image to users via their proxy server. Thus, the user agent that we see on our end from Gmail users are actually from Gmail servers.
Avoid Spam Filters
To avoid triggering spam filters, you need to slowly build up your sender reputation by sending emails only to users who are expecting them. Things like email engagement (bounce/spam rates) will affect your reputation. See Who Can You Send To.
---
# Verify DNS Records
Topic: Emails | Section: DNS Records
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318449161/verify-dns-records
After setting up SMTP profile, you need to verify DNS records before SMTP profile can be eligible for sending. Go to smtp profiles page and select View DNS Records for profile.Update DNS records to verify that you own the specified domain. After you update DNS records, wait for a few minutes for DNS to propagate. After that, click Check DNS Records to verify your modified DNS records. Once verified, this SMTP profile will be live and eligible for sending.
---
# Amazon SES Domain Verification
Topic: Emails | Section: DNS Records
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3942451481110/amazon-ses-domain-verification
For Amazon SES, both OnVoard and Amazon SES DNS verifications must be live before the smtp profile will be eligible for sending.For domain verification with Amazon SES, there will be 2 layers of verifications for dns records before smtp profile is eligible for sending. Even when you have updated your dns records correctly, it may take at least a few minutes for dns to be fully propagated and status to be updated on all platforms.OnVoard DNS VerificationsThe first layer of verifications will be done by OnVoard. We'll check your dns records immediately when you click "Check DNS Records" button.Amazon SES Domain VerificationThe second layer of verifications will be fetching your domain verification status from Amazon SES. The dns records checked are the same as the ones checked by OnVoard. But Amazon SES need to verify it as well on their end before domain is eligible for sending.Based on our experience Amazon SES may take a few minutes to update dns records statuses. Thus, please be prepared to wait for at least a few minutes for Amazon SES to update domain verifications status (even when you have added dns records correctly).
---
# SPF and DMARC Requirements
Topic: Emails | Section: DNS Records
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319762560/spf-and-dmarc-requirements
Starting April 2025, OnVoard require new sending domains to setup both SPF and DMARC before they can be eligible for sending. This requirements is added as most email service provider like gmail and yahoo now made it a requirement for senders to get their emails delivered to inbox.Since 2024, most email service provider have additional requirements for email senders to get email delivered to inbox.Updated gmail requirements for email sendersUpdated yahoo mail requirements for email sendersHow will the changes affect you?For detailed explanation, you can refer to the above sender requirements links. To keep things simple, we will only highlight the changes you need to make when sending emails with us. Other specified requirements like adding "List-Unsubscribe" header are already handled by us internally. Setup SPF and DMARC AuthenticationStart April 2025 with OnVoard, you need to setup SPF and DMARC authentication. All email senders regardless of your sending volume to setup SPF and DMARC authentication so you will always stay in compliance with the sender requirements as your customer base grow.Setup SPF record for OnVoardSetup DMARC authentication
---
# Add SPF record for OnVoard
Topic: Emails | Section: DNS Records
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319354639/add-spf-record-for-onvoard
Starting Feb 2024, gmail will require senders who are sending more than 5000 emails a day to setup SPF authentication. See updated gmail sending requirements in Feb 2024. We recommend all email senders to add the following SPF record for OnVoard. Go to your DNS provider and for your sending domain, add the following TXT record for SPF.v=spf1 include:spf.onvoard-mail.com ~allPreviously we map spf records to spf.onvoard.com but for consistency with other dns records we now switched spf mapping to spf.onvoard-mail.com. What if you already have an existing TXT record for SPF?If you already have an existing TXT record for SPF, you have merge the SPF entries into a single TXT record. Do not add multiple TXT records for SPF. It will cause SPF to check to fail. Don't do thisDon't add 2 TXT records for SPFRecord TypeDomainValueTTLTXTmyemaildomain.comv=spf1 include:_spf.google.com -allDefaultTXTmyemaildomain.comv=spf1 include:spf.onvoard-mail.com -allDefaultDo thisMerge all SPF entries into a single TXT recordRecord TypeDomainValueTTLTXTmyemaildomain.comv=spf1 include:_spf.google.com include:spf.onvoard-mail.com -allDefaultTools to check SPF recordhttps://mxtoolbox.com/spf.aspxhttps://easydmarc.com/tools/spf-lookup Additional Guides to add SPF recordhttps://support.google.com/a/answer/10684623?hl=enhttps://dmarcly.com/blog/can-i-have-multiple-spf-records-on-my-domain
---
# Setup DMARC authentication
Topic: Emails | Section: DNS Records
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319042637/setup-dmarc-authentication
Starting Feb 2024, gmail will require senders who are sending more than 5000 emails a day to setup DMARC authentication. See updated gmail sending requirements in Feb 2024. We recommend all email senders to setup DMARC authentication. How to setup DMARC (detailed)For detailed setup, follow this guide from google to setup DMARC. How to setup DMARC (quick and easy)Follow this guide if you don't care about DMARC reports and just want to a quick and easy way to get DMARC authentication. Add a TXT record for _dmarc with the valuev=DMARC1; p=reject; pct=100; Record TypeHostnameDomainValueTTLTXT_dmarcmyemaildomain.comv=DMARC1; p=reject; pct=100;Default Tools to check DMARChttps://mxtoolbox.com/dmarc.aspxhttps://dmarcian.com/dmarc-inspector/ Additional Guides to setup DMARChttps://mxtoolbox.com/dmarc/details/how-to-setup-dmarchttps://dmarcly.com/blog/how-to-set-up-dmarc-in-3-easy-steps
---
# Who Can You Send Email To?
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Compliance
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318679698/who-can-you-send-email-to
To ensure that we maintain a high sending reputation for businesses that run on our platform, OnVoard has strict guidelines on contacts you can send.
Who You Can Send
You can only send to contacts if they met any of these following requirements:
Sign up via your website.
Started checkout with your store.
Purchased from your store.
Opted in to receive marketing emails from your business.
Who You Can't Send
OnVoard is not a platform for cold emailing or prospecting for new clients. You should not use OnVoard to send to contacts if they are collected via:
Third-party lists.
Purchased or rented lists.
Scraping
Keep in mind that we may suspend accounts that violate our guidelines or uses OnVoard for spamming.
---
# Sending has been Disabled
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Compliance
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318494267/sending-has-been-disabled
Sending may be disabled for your account if our system detects:
High bounce rate from your emails
High percentage of emails being marked as spam
Suspicious activity
What are the limits?
Hard Bounce Rate: Must be within 5%.Spam Report Rate: Must be within 0.2%.
To check, you can view email delivery stats for your account.
What should I do if email sending is disabled?
The first thing you should do is to review your contacts and ensure that you are sending to people who've given you the permission to do so. Next, consider cleaning your list and unsubscribing contacts who've not been engaging with your emails.
After that is done, reach out to us at support@onvoard.com with answers for the following questions.
How did you obtain your contacts?
Did these contacts engage with your business before you emailed them? If so, how did they engage with your business? For example, did they sign up at your site, or purchased from your store.
---
# Can you use OnVoard to send transactional emails?
Topic: Emails | Section: Email Compliance
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318319552/can-you-use-onvoard-to-send-transactional-emails
No. OnVoard currently only supports sending marketing emails.
---
# Difference between archived and deleted email
Topic: Emails | Section: Email FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319455633/difference-between-archived-and-deleted-email
When an email is archived, it will be set to inactive but all history data like analytics, conversions, and recipients will still be kept.
When an email is deleted, all it's associated data will be deleted from our database. You can delete draft emails directly, but emails in other states (active/paused) must first be archived before you can delete them. This requirement is to prevent accidental deletes.
---
# Difference between hard bounced and soft bounced emails
Topic: Emails | Section: Email FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319054478/difference-between-hard-bounced-and-soft-bounced-emails
A recipient is identified as bounced when email can't be delivered to them. Bounces can be categorized into hard bounces and soft bounces.
Hard Bounces
Indicates a permanent error for email deliverability. The most common reason for hard bounces is when you try to send to an invalid email address. To protect your sender reputation, OnVoard automatically excludes hard bounced email addresses from all future emails.
Soft Bounces
Indicates a temporary error for email deliverability. Below are some common soft bounce reasons.
Message temporarily rejected by mailserver to prevent spam. (This is the most common reason)
Recipient inbox is full.
Recipient email server is offline.
Email can't be relayed due to connectivity reasons.
Inbox provider temporarily delaying messages from untrusted senders to prevent spams.
Email message is too large.
Email message blocked due to detected spam content.
Keep in mind that in some cases, a recipient may initially encounter a temporarily delayed soft bounce error before receiving a successfully delivered email. The following timeline will explain this scenario.
At 2am, we attempt to send email to john@example.com
john@example.com inbox provider temporarily delays receiving of message. This is sort of like in pending mode. The message was not blocked or rejected. Sometimes inbox providers do this to cap the number of deliveries from untrusted senders to prevent spams.
We will mark the recipient as soft bounced due to temporary issue.
At 5am, inbox provider notified that email has been successfully delivered. We will mark recipient with successfully delivered email.
---
# Sending to users who've opted-in to marketing emails
Topic: Emails | Section: Email FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318846871/sending-to-users-whove-opted-in-to-marketing-emails
When setting up emails, you can indicate that you want the email to only be delivered to contacts who've opted-in for marketing emails.
Go to Settings tab and locate Accepts Marketing config and set Required. With this config, we will automatically skip contacts who've not opted-in for marketing emails.
We recommend using this config for broadcasted emails such as newsletters and announcements.
---
# Average email performance benchmarks
Topic: Emails | Section: Email FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318684710/average-email-performance-benchmarks
Below are the benchmark metrics you can use to evaluate the performance of your email marketing campaigns.
Metric
Average Range
Open Rate
15% to 20%
Click Rate
2% to 4%
Hard Bounce Rate
0.5% to 0.8%
Unsubscribe Rate
0.2% to 0.5%
Spam Report Rate
0.05% to 0.1%
---
# Use your own Sendgrid account for sending
Topic: Emails | Section: Own SMTP
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318923526/use-your-own-sendgrid-account-for-sending
You can setup a SMTP profile that will use your own Sendgrid account for sending. Why use your own Sendgrid account?You will gain full control over deliverability. For example, you can setup dedicated IP in your Sendgrid account for sending.Save usage charges. OnVoard will charge your email transit usage instead of email sends usage when you use your own SMTP for sending.More in-depth email stats. You can login directly to your Sendgrid account to view raw email stats. RequirementsYou need your own Sendgrid account for this setup. 1) Setup SMTP ProfileGo to smtp profiles page to add a new smtp profile. Select Own SMTP for sender.Select Sendgrid for SMTP provider. 2) Sendgrid ConfigNext, we need API Key for your Sendgrid account. To retrieve the value, go to Settings > API Keys from Sendgrid console and locate value from there. Create a new API key if needed.With that, you should be able to create your SMTP profile. 3) Verify DNS RecordsBefore SMTP profile is eligible for sending, you need to verify DNS records for domain.Verify DNS Records 4) Using SMTP profileTo use SMTP profile, you can assign it to email profile. How to use SMTP Profile? How OnVoard manage your Sendgrid accountAfter SMTP profile is setup, OnVoard will automatically add new domain for Sendgrid account. You can view them in sender authentication page.We will also update event webhook in mail settings page.Important - do not modify the event webhook set by OnVoard. We use webhooks to track your email stats on our end. You will lose data if the event webhook is modified. Single Event Webhook LimitationsSendgrid only allow one event webhook to be used. If you are using another services that requires using event webhook, you would need to eitherSetup another sendgrid accountOr setup subuser within your sendgrid account. Subuser feature may not be available depending on your sendgrid plan subscription. How to cleanup profile in Sendgrid after SMTP Profile delete?When you delete SMTP profile, we will only remove it from OnVoard platform. You still need to manually delete the created domain in your Sendgrid account and disable event webhook. Of course, you can opt to keep settings intact for archive purposes.
---
# Use your own Postmark account for sending
Topic: Emails | Section: Own SMTP
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318774764/use-your-own-postmark-account-for-sending
You can setup a SMTP profile that will use your own Postmark account for sending. Why use your own Postmark account?You will gain full control over deliverability. For example, you can setup dedicated IP in your postmark account for sending.Save usage charges. OnVoard will charge your email transit usage instead of email sends usage when you use your own SMTP for sending.More in-depth email stats. You can login directly to your Postmark account to view raw email stats. RequirementsYou need your own Postmark account for this setup.Important: Please ensure that your Postmark account has been approved by Postmark team for sending external emails. Otherwise your emails will fail since your Postmark account has not been approved by them for sending external emails. See account approval process for Postmark? 1) Setup SMTP ProfileGo to smtp profiles page to add a new smtp profile. Select Own SMTP for sender.Select Postmark for SMTP provider. 2) Postmark ConfigNext, we need Account API Token for your postmark account. To retrieve the value, go to Postmark > Account > API Tokens and locate value from there.With that, you should be able to create your SMTP profile. 3) Verify DNS RecordsBefore SMTP profile is eligible for sending, you need to verify DNS records for domain.Verify DNS Records 4) Using SMTP profileTo use SMTP profile, you can assign it to email profile. How to use SMTP Profile? How OnVoard manage your Postmark accountAfter SMTP profile is setup, OnVoard will automatically create a new server for Postmark account. It will be named something like abcstore.com (OnVoard Managed). In general, you should avoid making modifications to this server since it will be handled and used by OnVoard for sending. Do not mix this server for sending with other services. Setup another server instead.Important - do not modify the webhook added by OnVoard. We use webhooks to track your email stats on our end. You may lose data if the created webhook is modified. OnVoard will also provision specified domain in your Postmark account. How to cleanup profile in Postmark after SMTP Profile delete?When you delete SMTP profile, we will only remove it from OnVoard platform. You still need to manually delete the created server and domain in your Postmark account. Of course, you can opt to keep the created server and domain for archive purposes.
---
# Getting Started with Workflows
Topic: Workflows | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319328036/getting-started-with-workflows
Workflow is a sequence of tasks to execute for contact when an event has occurred. Using Workflow, you can automate tasks such as:
Sending checkout abandonment email
Sending review request email after purchase
Run new contacts through welcome series.
Send price drop email email.
Workflow Steps
Each step is a task to execute within a workflow. There are various types of steps:
Trigger: Events that start a workflow. Each workflow can only have 1 trigger.
Email: Send email to contact.
Action: Execute actions like adding/removing tags.
Delay: Wait for specified period before proceeding to next step.
Wait: Wait until conditions are met.
Filter: Only proceed to next step if filter conditions are met.
Branch: Split paths based on conditions or percentage (for A/B test). Can only be added at the end of workflow.
Workflow Playbooks
OnVoard provides more than 20+ workflow playbooks that you can use to setup workflows within minutes. Go to workflow playbooks page to view a list of playbooks for common use cases like:
Checkout Abandonment
Cart Abandonment
Browse Abandonment
Price Drop
Low Stock
Welcome Series
Winback
Review Request
Other Workflow Settings
Can the following links on other workflow settings
Workflow Entry Requirements
Workflow Requirements
---
# Using Workflow Requirements
Topic: Workflows | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319184857/using-workflow-requirements
Workflow requirements are like global conditions. It will be checked before trigger/email/action steps.If requirements are not met, contacts will exit from workflow.
For example, in checkout abandonment workflow, you may have multiple email steps to be delivered over a period of time. In this case, you would want to exit workflow and stop sending abandonment email if the contact has placed order after entering workflow.
---
# Using Workflow Entry Requirements
Topic: Workflows | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318979034/using-workflow-entry-requirements
Entry requirements allows you to specify conditions that must be met before contact is eligible to be added to workflow.
Schedule
Specify schedule if you only want to run workflow within certain dates.
Membership
You can also use logic to filter contacts based workflow membership. The most common example is to filter contacts who've not been previously added to this workflow. This ensure that contact will only enter workflow once.
These are the available membership predicates
Not In This Workflow
Not In Any Workflows
Not In Specific Workflows
In Specific Workflows
---
# Date Property Trigger
Topic: Workflows | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318767438/date-property-trigger
Use date property trigger to trigger workflow based on date property of active contacts. In most cases, you would use to for anniversary and birthday workflows.
Below are notable configurations for date property trigger.
Date Property: This is the date property you would use. Like Date of Birth, Created Datetime etc.
Frequency: Can be Yearly or One-Time. If yearly, contact will be triggered once per year (birthday workflows). If one-time, contact will only be triggered once (appointment reminder workflows).
When will date property trigger workflow?
Date property trigger will be checked once per day. If eligible, it will trigger workflow.
---
# Periodic Trigger
Topic: Workflows | Section: Guide
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318514401/periodic-trigger
Use periodic trigger to run recurring workflow on active contacts from lists/tags/segments. For example, you can use it to:
Send monthly product recommendations
Send monthly report on reward points
Below are notable configurations for periodic trigger.
Lists (Optional): Will trigger periodically for contacts in specified lists.
Tags (Optional): Will trigger periodically for contacts in specified tags.
Segments (Optional): Will trigger periodically for contacts in specified segments.
Days of Week (Optional): Specify days of week for weekly trigger. For example, if Monday and Tuesday is selected, we will trigger weekly on Monday and Tuesday.
Dates of Month (Optional): Specify dates of month for monthly trigger. For example, if 1 and 5 is selected, we will trigger monthly on 1st and 5th of each.
When will periodic trigger workflow?
Periodic trigger will be checked every hour. If eligible, it will trigger workflow.
---
# Trigger Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319354013/trigger-step
Every workflow starts with a trigger. A workflow can only have one trigger.
Attached Resources
Each trigger is attached with resources that you can use in your workflow. In the case of Review Added trigger, it will provide us with the following resources.
Product
Contact
Review
Review Added
You can use attached resources to evaluate conditions or display it as output.
---
# Email Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319129554/email-step
Use email step to send email to contact in workflow.
A few things to know.
Workflow emails will be created and assigned under workflow. This means that each workflow can have multiple emails that you can use within it, but these emails can't be used for other workflows.
Workflow resources will be automatically passed to email, allowing you to use the resource inside email.
---
# Notification Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318926502/notification-step
Use notification step to send internal email notification to recipients groups. Keep in that notification emails will count towards email usage.
One common use case is to get notified whenever there's a new negative review.
---
# Delay Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318650096/delay-step
Use delay step to wait for specified period before proceeding to next step.
If schedule is turned on, workflow will only proceeds to next step until datetime is within schedule.
Our platform checks for delayed workflows every 30 minutes. Thus, you need to take into account that delayed workflows may be executed 30 minutes later than expected.
---
# Wait Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318576545/wait-step
Use wait step to wait until conditions are met. You can also set a time limit to cap waiting time.
For example, you can use wait condition to wait until a contact is double opted-in, before sending them a marketing email.
---
# Filter Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318452153/filter-step
When a filter step is used, workflow will only proceed to the next step if filter conditions are met.
Our convention for Filter Step description is to begin with "Continue if"
You can add conditions based on available resources for workflow.
Logic builder is similar to the one used for segmentation.
---
# Branch Step
Topic: Workflows | Section: Steps
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318319011/branch-step
Use branch step to split paths based on conditions or percentage (for A/B test). Branch step can only be added to the end of workflow.
Conditional Split
Split paths based on conditions.
You can add conditions based on available resources.
Logic builder is similar to the one used for segmentation.
Percentage Split
Split paths based on percentage.
Used for A/B testing.
---
# Difference between Checkout and Cart Abandonment
Topic: Workflows | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319524032/difference-between-checkout-and-cart-abandonment
Checkout abandonment and cart abandonment are not the same.
Checkout Abandonment
Shipping cost is the number one reason why users abandon checkout. On step-1 of checkout, user enters their details (name and email) to start checkout and view shipping costs. If they didn't place order after initiating checkout, we will treat them as users who've abandoned checkout.
Cart Abandonment
If identified user add item to cart but didn't place order, we will treat them as users who've abandoned cart.
---
# Prevent contact from entering workflow more than once
Topic: Workflows | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319177362/prevent-contact-from-entering-workflow-more-than-once
You can use workflow requirements to prevent contact from entering workflow more than once.
---
# Using JSON object in Workflow Action
Topic: Workflows | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318883042/using-json-object-in-workflow-action
Some workflow actions may accept a JSON object to update data. You need to ensure that provided JSON object is a valid otherwise the workflow will run into errors.
We recommend using the following tools to validate JSON object before submitting workflow:
https://jsonlint.com
https://jsonformatter.org
The most common issue is having trailing commas in JSON object.
// Invalid{ "name": "John Doe", "age": 25,}// Valid{ "name": "John Doe", "age": 25}
---
# How to exclude contacts from workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318713419/how-to-exclude-contacts-from-workflow
You can exclude contacts by email address from workflow.
Go to workflows and select view members for your workflow.
Select exclusions. You will can then manually specify email address to exclude or bulk upload via csv.
---
# Eligible Fields for Contact Update
Topic: Workflows | Section: FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318463930/eligible-fields-for-contact-update
The list of supported fields for contact update is the same as fields for Patch Contact endpoint from OnVoard API.
For creating a new contact, email is the only required field that must be provided.
For updating existing contact, OnVoard will only update provided fields.
These are the supported fields:
Field
Type
Description
email
string
Email of contact. Must be unique within account.
name
string
Name of contact.
phone
string
Phone for contact.
email_unsubscribed
boolean
If contact has unsubscribed from your emails.
lists[]
string array
Array of list IDs to assign contact.
tags[]
string array
List of tag names to assign contact. For example: ["tag-1", "tag-2"]. Our system will automatically create new tag if name doesn't exist.
properties[]
object array
List of contact properties.
Here's a sample payload. Keep in mind that payload must be a valid JSON object.
{
"name": "John Doe",
"phone": "+1-202-555-0172",
"tags": ["Customer"],
"properties": [{
"type": "country",
"value": "US"
}]
}
---
# Price Drop Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319522007/price-drop-workflow
You can use price drop workflow to inform users that price has dropped for products they've shown interest (viewed or add to cart). In another words, price drop workflow is a more targeted version of browse/cart abandonment workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is turned on and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Price Drop playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Trigger (Step 1).
Look for trigger delay minutes. This is the number of minutes to delay trigger after price drop event occur. Sometimes, merchants may accidentally update wrong price for product. Adding buffer time can help to prevent sending price drop notifications for incorrect updates.
For testing - you can leave it empty to view trigger in real time.
For production - we recommend setting a value between 3 to 5 minutes.
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Price Drop" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Price Drop Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Low Stock Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319270346/low-stock-workflow
You can use low stock workflow to inform users that stock level is running low for products they've shown interest (viewed or add to cart). In another words, low stock workflow is a more targeted version of browse/cart abandonment workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is turned on and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Low Stock playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Trigger (Step 1).
Look for trigger delay minutes. This is the number of minutes to delay trigger after low stock event occur. Sometimes, merchants may accidentally update wrong inventory quantity for product. Adding buffer time can help to prevent sending low stock notifications for incorrect updates.
For testing - you can leave it empty to view trigger in real time.
For production - we recommend setting a value between 3 to 5 minutes.
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Low Stock" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Low Stock Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Welcome Series Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318952373/welcome-series-workflow
Use welcome series workflow run through a series of message to engage with new contacts.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Welcome Series playbook.
Workflow Configurations
There are various ways to setup trigger for welcome series. The default trigger we use in our playbook is Added to List trigger. Depending on your preference, you can also use the following triggers.
Added to Segment
Added to Tag
In this playbook, we will send 2 emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Welcome Series (1st Email)" email template. We will welcome new contact and get them to follow us on social media.
Select Email (Step 5) and add new email with using template "Welcome Series (2nd Email for Existing Customer)". This email will recommend products to existing customers.
Select Email (Step 6) and add new email with using template "Welcome Series (2nd Email for Non-Customer)". This email will give non-customer a discount code for their first purchase.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Welcome Series Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Winback Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318784183/winback-workflow
Use winback workflow to reach out to existing customers who have not place order over a long period of time. Winback helps to recover customers who've churned.
Setting up Segment
Go to segment templates page and create segment Repurchase Opportunities. These are existing customers who haven't placed an order within the last 180 days.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Winback playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Trigger (Step 1) and use the created segment Repurchase Opportunities to trigger this workflow.
In this playbook, we will send 2 emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Winback (1st Email)" email template.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Winback (2nd Email)".
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Winback Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Replenishment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318542280/replenishment-workflow
If you sell perishable products, then it is a must to use replenishment workflow. Replenishment workflow allows you automatically send email notification if contact didn't repurchase after a brief period. Replenishment trigger will be automatically checked by our platform once per day.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Replenishment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Trigger (Step 1).
Specify Days Interval. This is the number of days to wait after last order before you send replenishment trigger is fired.
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Replenishment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Replenishment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Post Reviewed Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318483836/post-reviewed-workflow
Use Post Reviewed Workflow to automatically send an email with coupon discount when someone submits a review.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Post Reviewed playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Post Reviewed" email template.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Post Reviewed Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Review Replied Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318330054/review-replied-workflow
You can use Review Replied Workflow to send reviewers a notification email after their review has been replied by admin.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Review Replied playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Review Replied" email template.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Review Replied Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Negative Review Notification Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318341262/negative-review-notification-workflow
You can use Negative Review Notification Workflow to get notified whenever someone leaves a negative review.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Negative Review Notification playbook.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Birthday Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318325491/birthday-workflow
Use birthday workflow to delight your customers by sending them an email with discount when their birthday is approaching. Date property trigger used for birthday workflow will be automatically checked by our platform once per day.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Birthday playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Birthday" email template.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Birthday Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Customer Anniversary Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318392502/customer-anniversary-workflow
Use this workflow to reward customers anniversary with discounts on yearly registration anniversary. Date property trigger used for anniversary workflow will be automatically checked by our platform once per day.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Customer Anniversary playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Customer Anniversary" email template.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Customer Anniversary Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Monthly Product Recommendations Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318223458/monthly-product-recommendations-workflow
Use this workflow to send monthly product recommendations like new arrivals or top sellers to subscribers.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Monthly Product Recommendations playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Trigger (Step 1).
Specify audience you want to send to with lists, tags or segments.
Adjust your sending schedule accordingly.
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Monthly Product Recommendations" email template.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Monthly Product Recommendations Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Unengaged Cleanup Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Playbooks
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318219156/unengaged-cleanup-workflow
Cleaning up unengaged contacts by unsubscribing them from emails can improve deliverability and reduce costs.
In this playbook, we'll show you how to setup Unengaged Cleanup Workflow which allows you to automatically clean your list.
Unengaged Segment
To start, we need to segment unengaged contacts.
Go to segment library page and create new segment from Unengaged template.
Segment specifications:
Contacts who've not opened or clicked any emails within the last 180 days.
Must receive at least 10 emails.
Excludes contacts who've already unsubscribed from emails.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Unengaged Cleanup playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Trigger (Step 1) and use the created segment Unengaged to trigger this workflow.
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Unengaged Cleanup Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopify Checkout Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319346290/shopify-checkout-abandonment-workflow
Shipping cost is the number one reason why users abandon checkout. To recover this group of users, ecommerce platforms use multi-step checkout. On step-1 of checkout, user enters their details (name and email) to view shipping costs. If they abandon checkout after step-1 of checkout, we can use checkout abandonment workflow to recover these users.
Tip: Use discount code to recover users who've abandoned checkout. Even a $1 discount works more than you could imagine.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopify Checkout Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Disable abandoned checkout recovery option in Shopify to prevent sending redundant emails.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Checkout Abandonment playbook for Shopify.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 2 abandonment emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (1st Email)" email template
Select Email (Step 5) and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (2nd Email)"
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Checkout Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopify Cart Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319087558/shopify-cart-abandonment-workflow
Cart Abandonment is when a shopper add items to their cart, but leaves your store without making the purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify cart abandonment shoppers for your Shopify store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopify Cart Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Cart Abandonment playbook for Shopify.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 cart abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Cart Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Cart Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopify Browse Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318850875/shopify-browse-abandonment-workflow
Browse Abandonment is when a shopper visits product page, but leaves your store without making purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify browser abandonment shoppers for your Shopify store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopify Browse Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Browse Abandonment playbook for Shopify.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 browse abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Browse Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Browse Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopify Review Request Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318617193/shopify-review-request-workflow
You can skip the article if you're using Reviews app built-in email sending. This article is for those who wants to use Marketing Platform to send reviews emails.
Use this workflow to automatically send review request emails to customers after their orders have been fulfilled.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you have at least 1 reviews collector ready. If not, see guide for setting up reviews collector.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Review Request playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Review Request" email template
Email Settings
Inside email, go to Settings > Advanced > Reviews Collector and select reviews collector to use.
This will generate misc.reviews_collector_url variable use in write review button. Configure the rest of email config to your preferences and save it.
That's it, setting up Review Request Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopify Post Purchase Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318594972/shopify-post-purchase-workflow
Use this workflow to automatically send message to customers right after they've made a purchase. Post purchase emails have very high open rates. Use this opportunity to get customer to:
Follow your brand on social media.
Recommend your brand with their friends and unlock discount. For example, give $10 get $10.
Join your rewards program
Purchase add-ons with cross sell product recommendations.
Collect feedback or product reviews.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopify Post Purchase Workflow.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Post Purchase playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Post Purchase" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Post Purchase Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# EasyStore Checkout Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319370521/easystore-checkout-abandonment-workflow
Shipping cost is the number one reason why users abandon checkout. To recover this group of users, ecommerce platforms use multi-step checkout. On step-1 of checkout, user enters their details (name and email) to start checkout and view shipping costs. If they didn't place order after initiating checkout, we can use checkout abandonment workflow to recover these users.
Tip: Use discount code to recover users who've abandoned checkout. Even a $1 discount works more than you could imagine.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a EasyStore Checkout Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Checkout Started activity is tracked.
Disable abandoned checkout recovery option in EasyStore to prevent sending redundant emails.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
How OnVoard track Checkout Started activity?
For logged-in users, we will trigger checkout started activity when they view checkout page.
For guest users that are not logged in, we will trigger checkout started activity when they exit checkout page. User must specify email details on checkout form in order for us to track checkout started.
We will also update name and phone fields (if there are any). To prevent accidental overwrites, these fields will only be updated if the existing values are empty.
Keep in mind that we won't track checkout started if there are no items in cart.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Checkout Abandonment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 2 abandonment emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (1st Email)" email template
Select Email (Step 5) and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (2nd Email)"
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Checkout Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
Having issues with Checkout Abandonment?
See why checkout abandonment isn't working for EasyStore
---
# Why isn't checkout abandonment working for EasyStore?
Topic: Workflows | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319110303/why-isnt-checkout-abandonment-working-for-easystore
Checkout Started not Tracked
For checkout abandonment to work, web tracking needs to be installed and checkout started tracking needs to be turned on.
---
# EasyStore Cart Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318841078/easystore-cart-abandonment-workflow
Cart Abandonment is when a shopper add items to their cart, but leaves your store without making the purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify cart abandonment shoppers for your EasyStore site if:
Web Tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a EasyStore Cart Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Cart Abandonment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 cart abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Cart Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Cart Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# EasyStore Browse Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318650319/easystore-browse-abandonment-workflow
Browse Abandonment is when a shopper visits product page, but leaves your store without making purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify browser abandonment shoppers for your EasyStore site if:
Web Tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a EasyStore Browse Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Browse Abandonment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 browse abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Browse Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Browse Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# EasyStore Review Request Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318441508/easystore-review-request-workflow
You can skip the article if you're using Reviews app built-in email sending. This article is for those who wants to use Marketing Platform to send reviews emails.
Use this workflow to automatically send review request emails to customers after their orders have been fulfilled.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you have at least 1 reviews collector ready. If not, see guide for setting up reviews collector.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Review Request playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Review Request" email template
Email Settings
Inside email, go to Settings > Advanced > Reviews Collector and select reviews collector to use.
This will generate misc.reviews_collector_url variable use in write review button. Configure the rest of email config to your preferences and save it.
That's it, setting up Review Request Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# EasyStore Post Purchase Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318496334/easystore-post-purchase-workflow
Use this workflow to automatically send message to customers right after they've made a purchase. Post purchase emails have very high open rates. Use this opportunity to get customer to:
Follow your brand on social media.
Recommend your brand with their friends and unlock discount. For example, give $10 get $10.
Join your rewards program
Purchase add-ons with cross sell product recommendations.
Collect feedback or product reviews.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a EasyStore Post Purchase Workflow.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Post Purchase playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Post Purchase" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Post Purchase Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# BigCommerce Checkout Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319442852/bigcommerce-checkout-abandonment-workflow
Shipping cost is the number one reason why users abandon checkout. To recover this group of users, ecommerce platforms use multi-step checkout. On step-1 of checkout, user enters their details (name and email) to view shipping costs. If they abandon checkout after step-1 of checkout, we can use checkout abandonment workflow to recover these users.
Tip: Use discount code to recover users who've abandoned checkout. Even a $1 discount works more than you could imagine.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a BigCommerce Checkout Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Checkout Started activity is tracked.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Go to Store Settings within your BigCommerce account and disable Abandoned Cart Notifications to prevent sending redundant emails.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Checkout Abandonment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 2 abandonment emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (1st Email)" email template
Select Email (Step 5) and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (2nd Email)"
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Checkout Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# BigCommerce Cart Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319181184/bigcommerce-cart-abandonment-workflow
Cart Abandonment is when a shopper add items to their cart, but leaves your store without making the purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify cart abandonment shoppers for your BigCommerce store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a BigCommerce Cart Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Cart Abandonment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 cart abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Cart Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Cart Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# BigCommerce Browse Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318866605/bigcommerce-browse-abandonment-workflow
Browse Abandonment is when a shopper visits product page, but leaves your store without making purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify browser abandonment shoppers for your BigCommerce store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a BigCommerce Browse Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Browse Abandonment playbook.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 browse abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Browse Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Browse Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# BigCommerce Review Request Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318669310/bigcommerce-review-request-workflow
You can skip the article if you're using Reviews app built-in email sending. This article is for those who wants to use Marketing Platform to send reviews emails.
Use this workflow to automatically send review request emails to customers after their orders have been fulfilled.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you have at least 1 reviews collector ready. If not, see guide for setting up reviews collector.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Review Request playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Review Request" email template
Email Settings
Inside email, go to Settings > Advanced > Reviews Collector and select reviews collector to use.
This will generate misc.reviews_collector_url variable use in write review button. Configure the rest of email config to your preferences and save it.
That's it, setting up Review Request Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# BigCommerce Post Purchase Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318543436/bigcommerce-post-purchase-workflow
Use this workflow to automatically send message to customers right after they've made a purchase. Post purchase emails have very high open rates. Use this opportunity to get customer to:
Follow your brand on social media.
Recommend your brand with their friends and unlock discount. For example, give $10 get $10.
Join your rewards program
Purchase add-ons with cross sell product recommendations.
Collect feedback or product reviews.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a BigCommerce Post Purchase Workflow.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Post Purchase playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Post Purchase" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Post Purchase Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopline Checkout Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319728242/shopline-checkout-abandonment-workflow
Shipping cost is the number one reason why users abandon checkout. To recover this group of users, ecommerce platforms use multi-step checkout. On step-1 of checkout, user enters their details (name and email) to view shipping costs. If they abandon checkout after step-1 of checkout, we can use checkout abandonment workflow to recover these users.
Tip: Use discount code to recover users who've abandoned checkout. Even a $1 discount works more than you could imagine.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopline Checkout Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Disable abandoned checkout recovery option in Shopline to prevent sending redundant emails.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Checkout Abandonment playbook for Shopline.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 2 abandonment emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (1st Email)" email template
Select Email (Step 5) and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (2nd Email)"
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Checkout Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopline Cart Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319346734/shopline-cart-abandonment-workflow
Cart Abandonment is when a shopper add items to their cart, but leaves your store without making the purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify cart abandonment shoppers for your Shopline store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopline Cart Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Cart Abandonment playbook for Shopline.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 cart abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Cart Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Cart Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopline Browse Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319017454/shopline-browse-abandonment-workflow
Browse Abandonment is when a shopper visits product page, but leaves your store without making purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify browser abandonment shoppers for your Shopline store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Visitors can be identified. See trackable site visitors.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopline Browse Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Browse Abandonment playbook for Shopline.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 browse abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Browse Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Browse Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopline Review Request Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318719323/shopline-review-request-workflow
You can skip the article if you're using Reviews app built-in email sending. This article is for those who wants to use Marketing Platform to send reviews emails.
Use this workflow to automatically send review request emails to customers after their orders have been fulfilled.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you have at least 1 reviews collector ready. If not, see guide for setting up reviews collector.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Review Request playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Review Request" email template
Email Settings
Inside email, go to Settings > Advanced > Reviews Collector and select reviews collector to use.
This will generate misc.reviews_collector_url variable use in write review button. Configure the rest of email config to your preferences and save it.
That's it, setting up Review Request Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Shopline Post Purchase Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318510486/shopline-post-purchase-workflow
Use this workflow to automatically send message to customers right after they've made a purchase. Post purchase emails have very high open rates. Use this opportunity to get customer to:
Follow your brand on social media.
Recommend your brand with their friends and unlock discount. For example, give $10 get $10.
Join your rewards program
Purchase add-ons with cross sell product recommendations.
Collect feedback or product reviews.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Shopline Post Purchase Workflow.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Post Purchase playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Post Purchase" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Post Purchase Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Wix Checkout Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319651065/wix-checkout-abandonment-workflow
Shipping cost is the number one reason why users abandon checkout. To recover this group of users, you can use checkout abandonment workflow.
Tip: Use discount code to recover users who've abandoned checkout. Even a $1 discount works more than you could imagine.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Wix Checkout Abandonment Workflow.
How OnVoard identify checkout started user for Wix?
Checkout started will be triggered when identifiable user (like logged-in user) loads cart or checkout page when there are at least 1 item in cart. Loading cart page also triggers checkout started event because Wix allows paypal checkout, which will skip checkout page.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Checkout Started activity is tracked.
Disable Wix's abandoned cart emails to prevent sending redundant emails.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
To track checkout abandonment for Wix, users must be logged in to your site. Anonymous users can't be tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Checkout Abandonment playbook for Wix.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 2 abandonment emails to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (1st Email)" email template
Select Email (Step 5) and add new email with using template "Checkout Abandonment (2nd Email)"
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Checkout Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Wix Cart Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319222421/wix-cart-abandonment-workflow
Cart Abandonment is when a shopper add items to their cart, but leaves your store without making the purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify cart abandonment shoppers for your Wix store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
To track cart abandonment for Wix, users must be logged in to your site. Anonymous users can't be tracked.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Wix Cart Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Cart Item Added activity is tracked.
Understand difference between checkout abandonment and cart abandonment.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Cart Abandonment playbook for Wix.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 cart abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3)and add new email with using template "Cart Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Cart Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Wix Browse Abandonment Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318998860/wix-browse-abandonment-workflow
Browse Abandonment is when a shopper visits product page, but leaves your store without making purchase.
OnVoard is able to identify browser abandonment shoppers for your Wix store if:
Web Tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
To track browse abandonment for Wix, users must be logged in to your site. Anonymous users can't be tracked.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Wix Browse Abandonment Workflow.
Before you Begin
Ensure that web tracking is installed and Product Viewed activity is tracked.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Browse Abandonment playbook for Wix.
Workflow Configurations
In this workflow, we will send up to 1 browse abandonment email to contact.
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Browse Abandonment" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Browse Abandonment Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Wix Post Purchase Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318728838/wix-post-purchase-workflow
Use this workflow to automatically send message to customers right after they've made a purchase. Post purchase emails have very high open rates. Use this opportunity to get customer to:
Follow your brand on social media.
Recommend your brand with their friends and unlock discount. For example, give $10 get $10.
Join your rewards program
Purchase add-ons with cross sell product recommendations.
Collect feedback or product reviews.
In this guide, we'll show you how to setup a Wix Post Purchase Workflow.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Post Purchase playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 2) and add new email with using template "Post Purchase" email template
Click Submit to create workflow. That's it, setting up Post Purchase Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Wix Review Request Workflow
Topic: Workflows | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318563213/wix-review-request-workflow
You can skip the article if you're using Reviews app built-in email sending. This article is for those who wants to use Marketing Platform to send reviews emails.
Use this workflow to automatically send review request emails to customers after their orders have been fulfilled.
Before you Begin
Ensure that you have at least 1 reviews collector ready. If not, see guide for setting up reviews collector.
Setting up Workflow
Select Workflow Playbook
Go to workflow playbooks page and select Review Request playbook.
Workflow Configurations
Select Email (Step 3) and add new email with using template "Review Request" email template
Email Settings
Inside email, go to Settings > Advanced > Reviews Collector and select reviews collector to use.
This will generate misc.reviews_collector_url variable use in write review button. Configure the rest of email config to your preferences and save it.
That's it, setting up Review Request Workflow is easy when you are creating from playbook.
---
# Getting Started with Contacts
Topic: Contacts | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319344083/getting-started-with-contacts
Email is used to uniquely identify each contact. When adding a new contact, email is the only required field.
New contacts are automatically added to OnVoard when they are:
Email Recipients
Reviewers
Visitors who abandoned checkout from your ecommerce store. We automatically add them as contacts so you can use checkout abandonment workflow to follow-up.
Tracked for activities. When recording contact activities, we will automatically add contact if they didn't previously exist.
Contact States
Active: These are sendable contacts that will receive emails from your business. This is the default state for newly added contacts. You will be billed based on the number of active contacts.
Non-Sendable: Emails will not be delivered to non-sendable contacts. See definition for non-sendable contacts.
Suppressed: Suppressed contacts won't receive any message from you via OnVoard and will not be tracked. See definition for suppressed contacts.
Importing Contacts
By default, OnVoard will automatically import contacts when you are connected to sources. You can also import contacts via csv.
Relevant Links
See links below to learn more about working with contacts.
Using Contact Lists
Using Contact Segments
Contact Properties Guide
Contact Activities Guide
---
# Import Existing Contacts via CSV
Topic: Contacts | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319039235/import-existing-contacts-via-csv
Auto Import
OnVoard will automatically import contacts data after you are connected to ecommerce platform.
CSV Import
You can also use CSV to manually import contacts. Go to imports job page and add a new import job.
Select Contacts for Data Type and attach csv file for import.
On next step, specify field mappings and other configurations for import.
Email field must be mapped.
Additionally, you can specify lists and tags to add for imported contacts.
CSV Requirements
Must use comma (,) as delimiter.
Must use double quotes (") as quote char.
---
# Using Contact Lists
Topic: Contacts | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318764405/using-contact-lists
You can use lists to determine the type of content contact should receive. For example, you can create lists like Monthly Newsletters, Promotions, Product Announcements, and send relevant emails to list subscribers.
By default, OnVoard will automatically create contact list Newsletter for new accounts. This is the main list for your account. To keep things simple, you can use 1 main list as the main audience when broadcasting emails.
Difference between Lists and Tags
Lists provide better tooling to manage the type of content a contact can receive.
Contact can opt-in to specific lists when they modify communication preferences. Communication preferences link can be shown along with an unsubscribe link under email footer.
Bulk Add/Remove Contacts from List
See guide to bulk add/remove contacts from list.
How to export contacts from list
See guide to export contacts from list/tag/segment.
List in Workflows
Lists can be used triggers to start a workflow whenever a contact is added. There's also workflow action that allows you to add/remove contacts from lists.
---
# Using Contact Tags
Topic: Contacts | Section: Setting Up
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318510472/using-contact-tags
Tags can be used to categorize contacts.
Difference between Tags and Segments
Tags needs to be manually set while segments are automatically assigned based on preset conditions.
Bulk Add/Remove Contacts from Tag
See guide to bulk add/remove contacts from tag.
How to export contacts from tag
See guide to export contacts from list/tag/segment.
Tag in Workflows
Tags can be used triggers to start a workflow whenever a contact is added. There's also workflow action that allows you to add/remove contacts from tags.
Why we don't merge customer tags with ecommerce platforms?
Unlike product tags, customer tags in ecommerce platforms won't be merged into OnVoard as contact tags. This is to avoid conflicts since customer tags used in ecommerce platforms is used differently from contact tags used in marketing platform like OnVoard.
You can still view customer details like tags via contact associations. For example, see Shopify Customer Details in OnVoard.
---
# Contacts Bulk Actions
Topic: Contacts | Section: Managing Contacts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318416205/contacts-bulk-actions
Bulk action allows you to perform actions on large number of contacts using CSV file with single email column. Some examples of what you can do with bulk actions includes:
Adding/removing contacts from lists
Adding/removing contacts from tags
Bulk unsubscribing contacts from emails
Bulk update double opt-in status
Go to bulk actions page and add a new bulk action. You can bulk edit the following fields.
Accepts Marketing Emails
Email Unsubscribed
Suppressed
Email Double Opt-In Status
Lists
Tags
Upload CSV and Execute Bulk Action
After a bulk action is created, it will be in ready state. Click Execute once you have prepared a CSV file with single email column.
---
# Bulk Unsubscribe Contacts from Emails
Topic: Contacts | Section: Managing Contacts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318327465/bulk-unsubscribe-contacts-from-emails
You can use contacts bulk actions to bulk unsubscribe contacts from emails. Go to bulk actions page and add a new bulk action.
Under Email Unsubscribed section, tick Update Field and turn on Email Unsubscribed. After that save your config and upload CSV file with single email column to execute bulk action.
---
# Upload Suppressed Contacts
Topic: Contacts | Section: Managing Contacts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318368753/upload-suppressed-contacts
You can upload CSV file with a single email column to bulk suppress/unsuppress contacts.
Go to suppressed contacts page and click Upload CSV.
Specify if you want to Suppress Contacts or Unsuppress Contacts. Attach CSV file with single email column and click Upload.
---
# How often do Segments update?
Topic: Contacts | Section: Segments
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318686651/how-often-do-segments-update
Segments may update immediately or periodically depending on the scenarios. Below are use cases on when a segment will it's members. Segment is Created/UpdatedWhen a segment is created or updated, we will automatically update its membership in the background. Depending on the number of contacts you have in your account, it may take at least a few minutes for our system to evaluate segment members. Contact is Created/UpdatedWhenever a contact is created or updated, we will also reassign segments for that contact. Membership Update IntervalSegments will update eligible members every 12 hours. This means that for segments that use datetime conditions like "less than 5 days ago", there may be 12 hours delay in evaluation.
---
# Using Contact Segments
Topic: Contacts | Section: Segments
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318485616/using-contact-segments
Segments allows you to categorize contacts based on conditions. Contacts segmentation helps you determine who you want to deliver your emails to. Segmentation RulesContacts can be segmented based on various rules.With ActivitySegment based on contact's past activities like email clicks, checkouts, and purchases. In this example, segment contacts if they have:placed a Shopify Orderat least oncewithin the last 6 hourswhere total price is greater than 100With PropertySegment based on contact's properties like email status, country, and age.With AssociationSegment based on associated resource. In this example, segment contacts if they are:existing Shopify Customerwhere total spent on Shopify store is greater than 100 With ListSegment based on whether contacts is in a specific list. With SegmentSegment based on whether contacts is in a specific segment. Segment in WorkflowSegments can be used as triggers to start a workflow.For example, let's say you have a Repurchase Opportunities segment that includes existing customers who haven't placed an order within the last 180 days. You can setup a workflow to automatically deliver winback email when contacts are added to segment. Segment LibraryGo to segment library page to view a list of pre-packaged segments that you can use to help you setup your own segments. Existing CustomersFirst-Time Buyers: Customers who have made exactly one purchase at your store.Loyal Customers: Customers have who placed at least 1 order within the last 365 days. and at least 3 times over all time.Repeat Customers: Customers who have purchased more than once.Gold Customers: Customers who've spend at least $500.All Customers: Contacts who've spend more than $0. OpportunitiesBirthday Soon: Upcoming birthday within the next 30 daysPotential Buyers: Contacts who've engaged recently (last 30 days) but didn't make a purchase.Repurchase Opportunities: Existing customers who haven't placed an order within the last 180 days. Recent ActivitiesRecent Purchase: Customers who have made a purchase recently within the last 14 days.New Contacts: Newly added contacts within the last 14 days. List CleaningUnengaged: Contacts who've not opened or clicked any emails within the last 180 days. Must receive at least 10 emails. Excludes contacts who've unsubscribed from emails. GeographicIs from EU: Contacts who are from EU. Use this to identify contacts for GDPR.Not from EU: Contacts who are NOT from EU. This segment includes contacts with unknown location. How to export contacts from segmentSee guide to export contacts from list/tag/segment. Relevant LinksHow often do Segments update?
---
# Sync Contact Segments to Meta Custom Audience
Topic: Contacts | Section: Segments
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_8020955423036/sync-contact-segments-to-meta-custom-audience
What this doesA Meta Custom Audience sync keeps a Meta Custom Audience in step with an OnVoard segment. OnVoard creates the audience, owns it, and refreshes its membership for you. You can then target that audience in your ad campaigns, exclude it (for example, suppress existing customers from a prospecting campaign), or use it as the source for a Lookalike Audience.Contacts are matched to Meta users on hashed email and phone number. Nothing is matched using cookies, so the sync keeps working regardless of browser tracking restrictions.Before you startMeta enforces a few requirements before any customer list audience can be created. OnVoard cannot satisfy these for you, and each one shows up as an error from Meta when you try to create a sync. Please set all of them up first.1. Your ad account must be owned by a business portfolioMeta does not allow customer list audiences in a personal ad account. The ad account has to be owned by a business portfolio (this used to be called Business Manager).If you see this error:To create or edit a Custom Audience made from a customer list, your admin needs to add this ad account to a business.then the ad account you picked is a personal one. To fix it:Go to business.facebook.com and create a business portfolio if you do not have one already.Open Business settings, then Accounts, then Ad accounts.Either create a new ad account inside the business portfolio, or add your existing one.Please note the difference before you choose. Creating a new ad account inside the business portfolio is clean and reversible. Adding an existing personal ad account permanently transfers ownership of it to the business portfolio, and Meta does not let you undo that.2. You must accept Meta's custom audience termsThe terms have to be accepted once for each ad account. Meta only tells you about this by rejecting the audience, with an error like:Custom audience terms not accepted. To create or edit an audience with an uploaded customer list, agree to the custom audience terms at https://business.facebook.com/ads/manage/customaudiences/tos/?act=YOUR_AD_ACCOUNT_IDOpen that link and accept the terms. The link is specific to one ad account, so if you use more than one ad account you need to accept the terms for each of them. OnVoard also shows this link in the Create Audience Sync window once you pick an ad account.3. You need admin accessThe Facebook account you connect to OnVoard needs admin access to both the business portfolio and the ad account. If your access is limited to something less than admin, Meta will not let OnVoard create or update audiences in that ad account.Connecting FacebookIn OnVoard, go to Connections, then Meta Custom Audience.Select Connect Facebook and complete the Facebook login.Grant access to the ad accounts you want to use when Facebook asks.Your Facebook login is what OnVoard uses to push audiences. You can review or remove the connection at any time under Connections, then Manage Connections.Creating an audience syncGo to Connections, then Meta Custom Audience.Select Create Audience Sync.Pick the Segment whose contacts should become the audience members.Pick the Ad Account that will own the audience.Optionally set an Audience Name. If you leave it blank, OnVoard names it OnVoard - .Select Create.The first sync starts straight away. After that, OnVoard refreshes the membership automatically every few hours. You can select Sync Now on any row if you need to push immediately.Common issuesI do not see my ad account in the listOnVoard reads the list of ad accounts when you connect Facebook, and stores it with the connection. If you created or were given access to an ad account after connecting, OnVoard has not seen it yet.Go to Connections, then Manage Connections, and select Resync on the Facebook connection. Then reload the Meta Custom Audience page and the ad account should appear.If it still does not appear, check that your Facebook account has admin access to that ad account.The page says "No ad accounts found"Your Facebook connection worked, but the account you connected has no ad account that OnVoard can manage. This usually means either that you have not created an ad account yet, or that you did not grant access to it during the Facebook login. Select Reconnect Facebook and make sure you allow access to your ad account.My segment is not in the segment listOnly segments that have finished building can be synced. A segment that is still being calculated has no membership yet, so it is not offered. Wait for the segment to finish, then reload the page.The audience is empty or smaller than my segment in MetaThis is normal and expected. Two things cause it.First, Meta only counts people it can match. OnVoard sends hashed email addresses and phone numbers, and Meta can only add someone to the audience if that email or phone matches a Meta account. A match rate below 100 percent is completely normal, and it varies a lot by audience.Second, Meta needs time to process an upload. It can take up to 24 hours before the audience size in Ads Manager settles. The Last Synced column in OnVoard shows when we last pushed and how many people we sent, which is not the same number as the audience size Meta reports.Very small audiences may not be usable for ad targeting at all. Meta requires an audience to reach a minimum size before it will deliver ads to it.A row says "Reconnect needed"Facebook user access tokens expire roughly every 60 days, and they also stop working if you change your Facebook password or remove OnVoard's access. When that happens, OnVoard cannot push to Meta any more and marks the sync as needing a reconnect.Select Reconnect Facebook on the Meta Custom Audience page and log in again. Syncing resumes after that.A row says "Retrying"A recent push to Meta failed, but the failure looks temporary. OnVoard retries automatically on the next scheduled refresh, so there is nothing for you to do. If the problem keeps happening, the row changes to Error.A row says "Error"Pushes to Meta have failed repeatedly and OnVoard has stopped trying. This is almost always one of the setup requirements above, most often the custom audience terms not being accepted for that ad account. Fix the underlying problem, then select Resume Sync on the row.A row says "Paused"You paused it. OnVoard is not refreshing the membership, and the audience in Meta stays exactly as it was at the last sync. Select Resume Sync to start refreshing it again.How the refresh worksEvery few hours, OnVoard sends Meta the full current membership of the segment and replaces the audience contents with it. People who left the segment are removed, and people who joined are added.We deliberately replace the whole membership rather than sending changes one at a time. Replacing is what keeps the audience honest when a contact leaves a segment quietly, and it does not reset the learning phase of any ad set using the audience.Because the refresh is on a schedule, a contact who joins or leaves a segment is not reflected in Meta instantly. If you need an immediate push, select Sync Now.Removing a syncSelect Remove Sync on the row. This deletes the sync in OnVoard only. The audience itself is left in place in Meta on purpose, so that any live ad set still targeting it keeps working. The audience simply stops being refreshed and stays at its last synced membership.If you also want the audience gone, delete it in Meta Ads Manager after removing the sync.
---
# Contact Activities Guide
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact Activities
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319339570/contact-activities-guide
Activities denote actions done by contacts. Keeping track of contact's activities have several uses.
SegmentationActivities can be used to segment contacts. For example, users with placed order activity within the last 14 days can be segmented as Recent Customer.
Workflow TriggerActivities are also commonly used as triggers to start a workflow. For example, a Checkout Abandonment Workflow would be triggered by Started Checkout Activity.
See available contact activities for your account.
Activity Data
Each activity will have it's own resource to store collected data records.
To view collected data records for each activity, go to contact activities page and click View Records for activity.
{ "activity_id": "ctact_zeftuiqddd1qmgt58ydt", "activity_datetime": 1592650039, "contact_id": "ct_99pjwz4m1sx9ej8", "contact_email": "twalker@may.com", "email_id": "em_vd5rmbu15cktuiz", "email_name": "still-mouse-1358", "broadcast_id": "brd_n80lwnvxpolpm26", "recipient_id": "erpt_uumm1bputajjjdd", "broadcast_token": "shrill-queen-1328"}
This is an example of how a record for Email Delivered activity looks like.
Custom Activities
You can also add custom activity to track additional activities from contacts. See how you can add custom contact activities.
---
# Adding Custom Contact Activities
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact Activities
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319046662/adding-custom-contact-activities
You can add custom activity to track additional activities from contacts.
Create Custom Resource
To start, you need to create a custom resource that will be used to store data for custom activity. Go to custom resources page and add a new custom resource.
Things to note:
Key can't be changed later.
Select Activity for kind.
Click Save to create custom resource. After resource is created, click View Properties to go to resource properties page.
When a custom resource with activity kind is created, OnVoard will automatically generate the following properties:
activity_id
activity_datetime
contact_id
contact_email
These properties will be present in all activity resource and cannot be modified or deleted. OnVoard will automatically augment values for these properties when we record a contact activity.
You can add additional properties to this resource if you want to pass more data for activity. For example, a Wishlist Item Added activity will have the following properties:
activity_id (Auto Generated)
activity_datetime (Auto Generated)
contact_id (Auto Generated)
contact_email (Auto Generated)
product_id
product_name
wishlist_id
wishlist_name
The data you pass when recording activity would look something like:
{ "product_id": "56789", "product_name": "Spiderman Mini", "wishlist_id": "12345", "wishlist_name": "Toy Collectibles"}
Actual recorded data after augmentation by OnVoard would be like:
{ "activity_id": "ctact_zber4co2k1lme1m1yztk", "activity_datetime": 1592650039, "contact_id": "ct_99pjwz4m1sx9ej8", "contact_email": "jane@example.com", "product_id": "56789", "product_name": "Spiderman Mini", "wishlist_id": "12345", "wishlist_name": "Toy Collectibles"}
Create Custom Contact Activity
After resource has been created, go to custom contact activities page to add activity.
Select the resource that you have just created. Ideally, activity name should be the same as linked resource name.
Descriptor Template (Optional)
You can also specify descriptor template for activity. Generated descriptor will be shown in contact's profile timeline to provide activity details. Liquid template language is used to generate output and resource properties will be available as variables.
Record Data:{ "order_number": 1038, "currency": "SGD", "total_price": 15.55,}Descriptor Template:Placed order #{{ order_number }} worth {{ currency }} {{ total_price }}.Descriptor Output:Placed order #1038 worth SGD 15.55.
A preview of descriptor output generated from record data and descriptor template.
Generated descriptor will be shown in contact's profile page when displaying activities.
Recording Custom Activity
Javascript API
Use OnVoard's Web Tracking Javascript API to record custom activity on client side.
OnVoard API
Alternatively, use OnVoard API to record custom activity on server side. For more details, see OnVoard's API Docs.
---
# Descriptor Template for Contact Activity
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact Activities
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318960205/descriptor-template-for-contact-activity
When adding custom contact activity, you can also specify descriptor template. Specified template will be used to generate descriptor shown in contact's profile timeline to provide additional details for activity. You can use liquid templating to render output. Activity record properties can be used as variables. For example, below is an example of rendered descriptor for Review Added activity.
Here's the descriptor template used for Review Added activity.
Title: {{ review_title }}Content: {{ review_content }}Rating: {{ rating }}/5Product: {{ product.name }}
To view available variables for Review Added, see it's resource properties page and resource records page. Using the same concept, you can specify your own descriptor template for custom activity.
---
# Contact Properties Guide
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact Properties
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319326314/contact-properties-guide
By default, OnVoard automatically generates a set of predefined contact properties.
Predefined Properties
id: Unique identifier for contact.
first_name: First name of contact. This is auto generated from contact's name.
last_name: Last name of contact. This is auto generated from contact's name.
name: Name of contact.
email: Email for contact.
phone: Phone for contact.
suppressed: Suppressed contacts won't receive any message from you via OnVoard and will not be tracked.
email_sendable: If true, OnVoard will be able to send emails to this contact. Will be false if any of suppressed, email_unsubscribed, email_marked_as_spam, or email_hard_bounced is true.
email_unsubscribed: If contact has unsubscribed from your emails.
email_marked_as_spam: If contact has marked your email as spam. If true, OnVoard will no longer attempt to send any emails to this contact.
email_hard_bounced: If previous emails sent to contact returns hard bounce error. If true, OnVoard will no longer attempt to send any emails to this contact.
email_soft_bounced_count: Number of soft bounces without any successful email delivery. If number reaches 5, we will unsubscribe contact and set email_hard_bounced to true. Counter resets to 0 upon successful email delivery.
tags: List of tags for contact.
country: Country of contact's address.
region: Region name of contact's address. Typically a province, a state, or a prefecture.
city: City of contact's address.
street_address: Contact's street address.
postal_code: Postal code of contact's address.
timezone: Timezone for this contact.
is_from_eu: Value is automatically generated by our system. This will be true if either country or ip_country is part of EU.
dob: Contact's date of birth.
age: Contact's age. This is automatically generated based on date of birth.
days_until_next_birthday: Number of days until next birthday. This is automatically generated based on date of birth.
created_datetime: Datetime contact was created.
suppressed_datetime: Datetime contact was suppressed. This value will only be set for suppressed contact.
total_spent_last_90_days: Total spent from contact over the last 90 days. Cancelled, unpaid and refunded orders are automatically deducted.
total_spent_last_365_days: Total spent from contact over the last 365 days. Cancelled, unpaid and refunded orders are automatically deducted.
total_spent: Total spent based on orders history. Cancelled, unpaid and refunded orders are automatically deducted.
total_refunds: Total refunded amount based on orders history. Will exclude cancelled and voided orders.
last_order_placed_at: Datetime on when contact last placed an order.
num_valid_orders: Total number of valid orders from this contact. Will exclude cancelled and voided orders.
ip_country: Country inferred from contact's IP address.
ip_region: Region inferred from contact's IP address.
ip_city: City inferred from contact's IP address.
ip_timezone: Timezone inferred from contact's IP address.
last_email_delivered_at: Datetime on when we last delivered email to contact.
last_email_opened_at: Datetime on when contact last open email send from us.
last_email_clicked_at: Datetime on when contact last click email send from us.
Custom Properties
You can also add custom properties to store additional information for your contacts. See how you can add custom contact properties.
---
# Adding Custom Contact Properties
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact Properties
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319011686/adding-custom-contact-properties
You can add custom contact properties to store additional data for your contacts.
Go to custom contact properties page and click Add Property.
.
Fill up the fields and click Save to create custom contact property. Keep in mind that Key and Field Type can't be modified later.
---
# What are Active Contacts?
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319413388/what-are-active-contacts
Active Contacts are sendable contacts who can receive emails from your business. This is the default state for newly added contacts. You will be billed based on the number of active contacts.
---
# What are Non-Sendable Contacts?
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319044220/what-are-non-sendable-contacts
Non-Sendable Contacts are contacts that won't receive any delivered emails. These contacts will not be billed.
A contact is deemed non-sendable if any of the following is true:
Is suppressed
Unsubscribed from emails
Marked email as spam
Hard bounce from previous emails
Is Suppressed
Suppressed contacts also won't be tracked by OnVoard. See definition for suppressed contacts.
Unsubscribed from emails
Contacts can be unsubscribed by end-user themselves or by admin. This status can be modified via email_unsubscribed field.
Marked Email as Spam
If a contact marked your email as spam, OnVoard will no longer attempt to send any emails to that contact again. This config is permanent and can't be modified. We're setting this config permanent in order to protect your sending reputation and improve email deliverability.
Hard bounce from previous emails
Contact will be marked as hard bounced if previous emails sent to contact returns hard bounce error.
If a contact hard bounced, OnVoard will no longer attempt to send any emails to that contact again. To protect your sending reputation and improve email deliverability, this config is permanent and can't be modified.
---
# What are Suppressed Contacts?
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318819420/what-are-suppressed-contacts
Suppressed contacts are users who want to be forgotten by your business. When contact is suppressed, we will erase all data associated with them. This includes activities, reviews, properties, and email history.
Suppressed contacts won't receive any message from you via OnVoard and will not be tracked. You won't be billed for suppressed contacts.
You can only unsuppress a suppressed contact. They can't be modified in any other ways and can't be deleted.
---
# How to bulk add/remove contacts from list
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318526265/how-to-bulk-addremove-contacts-from-list
You can upload CSV file with a single email column to bulk add/remove contacts from a list.
Go to contact lists page. Select list and click Upload CSV.
Specify if you want to Add Contacts or Remove Contacts. Attach CSV file with single email column and click Upload.
Keep in mind that CSV upload will only add/remove existing contacts from list. It will not create new contacts and will skip suppressed contacts.
Using Bulk Actions
Another way to bulk add/remove contacts from list is to use bulk actions.
---
# How to bulk add/remove contacts from tag
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318455131/how-to-bulk-addremove-contacts-from-tag
You can upload CSV file with a single email column to bulk add/remove contacts from a tag.
Go to contact tags page. Locate tag and click Upload CSV.
Specify if you want to Add Contacts or Remove Contacts. Attach CSV file with single email column and click Upload.
Keep in mind that CSV upload will only add/remove existing contacts from tag. It will not create new contacts and will skip suppressed contacts.
Using Bulk Actions
Another way to bulk add/remove contacts from tag is to use bulk actions.
---
# How to export contacts from list/tag/segment
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318330878/how-to-export-contacts-from-listtagsegment
Go to contacts page.
1) Filter contacts by list/tag/segment
2) Then click Export Contacts to export contacts based on specified filters.
---
# Block Disposable Email Address
Topic: Contacts | Section: Contact FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318331294/block-disposable-email-address
OnVoard blocks disposable email address for contacts. Disposable email addresses are generally very low quality since they can be easily abused. Blocking these email addresses helps us to keep your list clean and protect your sender reputation.
---
# Guide for Resources
Topic: Data Management | Section: Resources
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319310886/guide-for-resources
Resources are how data gets represented at OnVoard. In technical terms, a resource is somewhat similar to a schema, spec, or protocol. Each resource has it's own property specifications so that data can be represented in a consistent manner.
See available resources for your account.
Resource TypesThere are 3 types of resources.
OnVoard: Resource that represents object or activity within OnVoard's platform. For example, contact will represent contact object, email_delivered will represent and store data for Email Delivered activity.
External: Resource that represents an object or activity from external platforms. For example, shopify.customer will represent Shopify Customer object, shopify.checkout_started will represent and store data for Shopify Checkout Started activity.
Custom: You can create your own custom resource. All custom resource will have custom namespace. For example, custom.crm_users could be used to represent CRM users from your internal system.
Resource Kinds
A resource can also be classified under 2 kinds.Object: Resource represents an entity like customer, order, and product.
Activity: Resource represents contact's activity like email delivered/opened/clicked.
How OnVoard use Resources
Resources are used in almost every OnVoard key features.
Email uses resources to represent passed data. For example, {{ shopify.order.total_price
}} will be replaced with the total price of a Shopify Order.
Contact segmentation uses resource properties to compare condition values.
Workflow use resources for filter and branching logic.
---
# Resource Associations
Topic: Data Management | Section: Resources
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319045855/resource-associations
Associations are how resources interlink between each other. It allows you to access property values from an associated resource. For example, an association between Contact and Shopify Customer resource allows you to access total spent with {{ contact.shopify_customer.total_spent }}
See available resource associations for your account.
Using Resource Associations
Email Editor
When creating emails, you can add association to existing resource. This provides you with valuable data to help you craft personalized email. In this case, after adding association for Shopify Customer, {{ contact.shopify_customer.total_spent }} can be used to display total spent.
Contact Segmentation
Contact segmentation is an area where association can be super handy. It allows you to build conditions based on properties from an associated resource. In this case, we are creating a segment where Contact is an existing Shopify Customer with total spent greater than 100.
---
# Import CSV Data to OnVoard
Topic: Data Management | Section: Importing Data
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319333441/import-csv-data-to-onvoard
OnVoard will automatically import customers, products, and orders data after you are connected to your ecommerce platform. In some cases, you may need to manually import csv data to OnVoard.
See links below on guide for data import.
Import Existing Contacts via CSV
Import Existing Reviews via CSV
Import Back-In-Stock Subscribers via CSV
CSV Requirements
Must use comma (,) as delimiter.
Must use double quotes (") as quote char.
---
# Taxonomy in OnVoard
Topic: Data Management | Section: Other Data Tools
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319061037/taxonomy-in-onvoard
You can use taxonomy to view eligible values for enumerations.
When to use Taxonomy
When adding conditions for segments or workflows, sometimes you may need to compare values for certain fields like country. As such, it may be handy to be able view list of eligible values for country.
For more, view full taxonomy list.
---
# Setting up OnVoard Account for Merchants
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319498032/setting-up-onvoard-account-for-merchants
See in-depth setup instructions for based on your ecommerce platform: ShopifySetup Guide for Shopify BigCommerceSetup Guide for BigCommerce EasyStoreSetup Guide for EasyStore Other PlatformsSetup Guide for Other Platforms
---
# Setting up Ecommerce Products
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319311452/setting-up-ecommerce-products
Setting up ecommerce products allows you to:
Collect and display reviews for products.
Use Product List Block, Reviews Block, and Star Rating Block in email.
Connect to Ecommerce Platform
After you are connected to your ecommerce platform, OnVoard will automatically import your store's products.
Product Groups
Groups allows you to share reviews across all products in the same group. One use case would be to tap in to existing reviews from relevant products when you are launching a new product.
For example, let's say we have 3 products all grouped under Perfumes.
Product
Num Reviews
Avg Rating
Perfume A
10
5
Perfume B
10
3
Perfume C
0
-
Displayed num reviews and avg rating would be 20 and 4.
Go to product groups page if you want to add new group.
Product Resource
Some key properties to note when working with Product Resource.
Property
Description
Example
id
Unique identifier for Product in OnVoard's platform.
prd_y7rkqvse2v16rty
external_id
Unique identifier for Product in ecommerce platform.
4510810767408
---
# Setup Guide for Shopify
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319660941/setup-guide-for-shopify
For Shopify merchants, you can follow guides for each apps below to setup OnVoard for your store.Setup Marketing Platform on ShopifySetup AOV Progress Bar on ShopifySetup Back In Stock on ShopifySetup Reviews on ShopifySetup Reperks on ShopifySetup Product Recommender on ShopifySetup ActionPop on Shopify Need help setting up?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com Uninstalling AppSee Uninstallation notes for Shopify users.
---
# Uninstallation notes for Shopify users
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Shopify
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318691380/uninstallation-notes-for-shopify-users
Updated: Scripts are now automatically removed
The following instructions are for legacy users who've installed OnVoard before app blocks is used for widget installation. OnVoard now uses app blocks for installation and scripts are automatically removed from your storefront when you uninstall our app.
How to know if you're using app block installation?
If you have used app block to add our widget to your theme, then it's app block installation. If widget installation is done automatically or via manual script installation, then you need to use the following instructions for cleanup. Regardless, if you want to be extra safe, feel free to refer to the clean up notes below.
Clean up scripts for legacy Shopify installation
Before you uninstall OnVoard's app from Shopify, you should turn off install scripts from Shopify settings page to ensure that snippets installed by OnVoard gets removed accordingly. After OnVoard app is uninstalled from Shopify, we won't have API access to perform cleanup tasks.
After that is done, wait for a few minutes since the cleanup task is performed in the background.
To check if there's any leftover snippet from OnVoard, go to your Shopify theme editor and search for onvoard to verify that OnVoard snippets have been removed.
What if you've already uninstalled OnVoard?
There are 2 options if you've already uninstalled OnVoard and need to remove installed snippets.
1) Reinstall
You can reinstall OnVoard and turn off install scripts from Shopify settings page to initiate cleanup tasks. After that, you can uninstall OnVoard again.
2) Remove Manually
A more tedious approach would be to remove OnVoard snippets manually in your theme.
First, go to layout/theme.liquid file and search for onvoard code and remove all of them.
For example:
{% include "onvoard-loader" %}
{% include "onvoard-initialize-head" %}
{% include "onvoard-initialize-body" %}
Savelayout/theme.liquid file.
Then within the theme search for onvoard files and delete them.
This should remove all onvoard files and script references.
Uninstall OnVoard App
From Shopify admin, go to apps page to uninstall OnVoard app.
---
# Setup Guide for BigCommerce
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319611946/setup-guide-for-bigcommerce
For BigCommerce merchants, you can follow guide below to setup OnVoard for your store. Connecting BigCommerce StoreTo begin, you need to install OnVoard app from BigCommerce app store. A single app installation will provide access to all our apps. Setup OnVoard AppsNext, follow guides below to setup each of OnVoard apps.Setup Marketing Platform on BigCommerceSetup AOV Progress Bar on BigCommerceSetup Back In Stock on BigCommerceSetup Reviews on BigCommerceSetup Reperks on BigCommerceSetup Product Recommender on BigCommerceSetup ActionPop on BigCommerce Demo StoreView demo store to see OnVoard's widgets live including reviews, restock alerts, cart nudges, and more.Need help setting up?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# How to setup collaborator access for BigCommerce technical assistance
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_7983325078876/how-to-setup-collaborator-access-for-bigcommerce-technical-assistance
For BigCommerce technical assistance especially for editing theme files, we require merchants to setup collaborator access for usto access your storefront.Go to Account Settings › Users. and create new user.For email address, specify ryan@onvoard.com .When setting permission access, ensure that our collaborator access have sufficient permission needed for technical assistance.
---
# Default stock level if product inventory is not tracked by BigCommerce
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319231234/default-stock-level-if-product-inventory-is-not-tracked-by-bigcommerce
If a product inventory is not tracked by BigCommerce, OnVoard will automatically set stock level on our end.
For every variant, product stock level will increment by 1000. Why not set to zero instead? Setting to zero will denote a product as out-of-stock and alters the behavior for some of our apps like back-in-stock and recommender.
---
# Troubleshoot blank screen when loading app in BigCommerce
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: BigCommerce
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319035954/troubleshoot-blank-screen-when-loading-app-in-bigcommerce
You might get blank screen when you load OnVoard app inside BigCommerce admin. This is because some features in OnVoard's app don't work well when it's loaded within BigCommerce admin since it uses iframe due to same-origin policies.
How to resolve this?
To resolve this, we recommend you to use OnVoard app in it's own browser tab.
Go to https://console.onvoard.com/
---
# Setup Guide for EasyStore
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319672992/setup-guide-for-easystore
For EasyStore merchants, you can follow guides for each apps below to setup OnVoard for your store.Setup Marketing Platform on EasyStoreSetup AOV Progress Bar on EasyStoreSetup Back In Stock on EasyStoreSetup Reviews on EasyStoreSetup Reperks on EasyStoreSetup Product Recommender on EasyStoreSetup ActionPop on EasyStore Need help setting up?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# Default stock level if product inventory is not tracked by EasyStore
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319541589/default-stock-level-if-product-inventory-is-not-tracked-by-easystore
If a product inventory is not tracked by EasyStore, OnVoard will automatically set stock level on our end.
For every variant, product stock level will increment by 1000. Why not set to zero instead? Setting to zero will denote a product as out-of-stock and alters the behavior for some of our apps like back-in-stock and recommender.
---
# Setup Guide for Shopline
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Shopline
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319763654/setup-guide-for-shopline
For Shopify merchants, you can follow guides for each apps below to setup OnVoard for your store.Setup Marketing Platform on ShoplineSetup AOV Progress Bar on ShoplineSetup Back In Stock on ShoplineSetup Reviews on ShoplineSetup Reperks on ShoplineSetup Product Recommender on ShoplineSetup ActionPop on Shopline Need help setting up?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# Setup Guide for Wix
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319643669/setup-guide-for-wix
For Wix merchants, you can follow guide below to setup OnVoard for your store. Connecting Wix StoreTo begin, you can install OnVoard apps from Wix app store. See all our Wix apps. Setup OnVoard AppsNext, follow guides below to setup each of OnVoard apps.Setup Marketing Platform on WixSetup AOV Progress Bar on WixSetup Back In Stock on WixSetup Reviews on WixSetup Product Recommender on WixSetup ActionPop on WixSetup Reperks on Wix Things to know for Wix IntegrationBelow are things you should know for Wix integration.You need a paid Wix account and connected domain for integration to work.Custom widget installation for Wix Widgets not Working?See Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix Need help setting up?If you need additional help to setup, you can contact us at support@onvoard.com
---
# Custom widget installation for Wix
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319271900/custom-widget-installation-for-wix
Custom widget installation for Wix will not work because Wix only allows embedding third-party widget into iframe. OnVoard widgets needs to be executed within the same DOM as your main site so embedding into iframe won't work. For most widgets, like reviews widget, you will be provided with Auto placement option, which should be sufficient to help you install widget to your site. Need help installing?If you need additional help to install, you can contact us.
---
# Troubleshooting: Widgets not showing on Wix
Topic: Ecommerce | Section: Wix
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318957265/troubleshooting-widgets-not-showing-on-wix
Below are troubleshooting guides if widgets are not showing on your Wix site. Paid Plan and Connected Domain for WixAre you on paid plan and connected domain for Wix? If either of these 2 requirements are not met, our scripts won't update on your site. Accept Cookie ConsentIf you've enabled cookie consent for your Wix site, visitor must accept cookie consent before OnVoard widgets and scripts can be loaded. This is because our scripts are considered functional and would require acceptance of cookie consent if it has been enabled. Resync OnVoard ScriptsIn rare occasions, OnVoard scripts may not be fully synced with your store.To resolve that, go to this page and click Sync Scripts to manually resync OnVoard scripts. Ensure App Script is not PausedDouble check and confirm that you've not pause script for app.Ensure that you are using the latest version of our appsDouble check and confirm that you're using the latest version of our apps. Uninstall App and Reinstall AgainSometimes our embedded scripts may get updated. However, Wix will install the version of scripts when app is installed. This means that your store won't use the latest script. To resolve, you can try to uninstall our app and reinstall it again. Update CSS Selector for Selector PlacementIf you use selector placement to inject widget, ensure that css selector used for widget are updated. When you made changes to your Wix site, css structure will also change. Thus you would need to update selector placement everytime your css structure change. Alternatively, you can stick to auto placement. Change to Classic Layout for Product PageIf widgets is not showing on product page, try switching product page layout to Classic. Sometimes, templates may be buggy in other layout.
---
# User Access and Permission
Topic: General | Section: Information
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319492611/user-access-and-permission
The signup user will be assigned as the owner of your organization. Each account will only have 1 owner. Only the owner of an organization will have access to account and billing settings.
User Roles
There are 3 different kinds of roles for an account user.
Owner: Have complete access to the account. The user used for sign up will always be assigned with Owner role. Each account will only have 1 owner.
Admin: Have access to most configurations within an account. Doesn't have access to account and billing settings.
Read Only: Have read-only access. A recommended role for non-tech savvy users.
---
# How to switch between OnVoard apps?
Topic: General | Section: Information
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319236770/how-to-switch-between-onvoard-apps
You can switch OnVoard apps via header nav in top right corner.
---
# Adding Multiple Accounts
Topic: General | Section: Multiple Accounts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319412890/adding-multiple-accounts
Updates: 19th Nov 2022
Multi-account may not be available for all users. As an alternative, you can register for a separate account using a different email.
How to add another account?
Login to owner and go to accounts page. Then click Add Account. By default, you can add up to 5 accounts. Feel free to contact us if you need to increase this limit.
You can add multiple accounts for a single login. This allows you to manage multiple stores without the need to maintain multiple login credentials.
How does billing work for multiple accounts?
Billing is handled on account-level. Each account will have its own separate billing details and subscription plans. If you have 3 accounts with paid subscriptions, you will be charged for all these 3 accounts.
Each OnVoard account can only connect to 1 store
This is to ensure data integrity and avoid mixing data across multiple stores. Let's say you have the following stores:
mysamplestore-1.com
mysamplestore-2.com
You need to use 2 different accounts to connect to these 2 stores, irregardless of the ecommerce platform (Shopify/BigCommerce/EasyStore) it is running on.
You will be prompt to switch account if you try to connect to a different ecommerce store.
Different OnVoard accounts can't be connected to the same store
This is to avoid conflicts in configurations for your ecommerce platform. For example, let's say if we allow 1 store to be connected to 2 different accounts, A and B. Given the following scenario:
Account A set install scripts as turned on.
Account B set install scripts as turned off.
In this case, OnVoard won't be able to decide if we should install scripts onto your store since both accounts specify different install settings.
Best Practices for Multiple Accounts
When using multiple accounts, always allocate 1 dedicated account for each store.
Never mix store connection across accounts. Doing so will taint your data since customers, products, and orders data from both stores will now be treated as one. This will be extremely confusing and hard to maintain.
OnVoard has controls in place to prevent mixing of data across multiple stores.
---
# How to switch between accounts?
Topic: General | Section: Multiple Accounts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319227501/how-to-switch-between-accounts
If you have multiple accounts for a single login, you can easily switch account via header nav in top right corner.
---
# Why account can only connect to 1 store?
Topic: General | Section: Multiple Accounts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318821189/why-account-can-only-connect-to-1-store
This is to ensure data integrity and avoid mixing data across multiple stores. Let's say you have the following stores:
mysamplestore-1.com
mysamplestore-2.com
You need to use 2 different accounts to connect to these 2 stores, irregardless of the ecommerce platform (Shopify/BigCommerce/EasyStore) it is running on.
You will be prompt to switch account if you try to connect to a different ecommerce store.
---
# Why different accounts can't be connected to the same store?
Topic: General | Section: Multiple Accounts
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318680273/why-different-accounts-cant-be-connected-to-the-same-store
This is to avoid conflicts in configurations for your ecommerce platform. For example, let's say if we allow 1 store to be connected to 2 different accounts, A and B. Given the following scenario:
Account A set install scripts as turned on.
Account B set install scripts as turned off.
In this case, OnVoard won't be able to decide if we should install scripts onto your store since both accounts specify different install settings.
Can I switch store connection to another account?
Not really. Store can only be connected to an account at any point in time. This is to prevent confusion because if we allow multiple stores to connect to a single account, your account will have products from both stores. Each account is always be exclusively assigned to 1 store.
---
# Setting up Custom Page
Topic: General | Section: Technical
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319429723/setting-up-custom-page
Custom page allows you to serve branded urls like feedback.yourdomain.com for generated reviews collector page.
Setting up Custom Domain
Custom domain must be created before you can add custom page.
Go to custom domains page and add custom domain.
After adding your custom domain, go to your DNS provider's website (e.g. GoDaddy) and find DNS record for domain.
Add a CNAME record for domain with value custom.onvoard.io
After that is done, go back to custom domains page and verify your domain Normally it will take a few minutes for everything to be ready but keep in mind that it may take up to 72 hours for DNS to be fully propagated. Meanwhile, you can continue to setup custom page while domain is waiting to be verified.
Setting up Custom Page
Go to custom pages page and add custom page.
Slug is optional but must be distinct for selected domain.
If slug is left empty. Path for custom page will be same as domain, for example feedback.yourdomain.com.
If slug is specified, it will be appended at url path like feedback.yourdomain.com/reviews.
---
# OnVoard API
Topic: General | Section: Technical
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319031905/onvoard-api
For details about OnVoard API, go to our api docs at https://api-docs.onvoard.com.
To use OnVoard API, go to api details page to get your api key. Currently only organization owner has access to api keys.
---
# OnVoard Webhooks
Topic: General | Section: Technical
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318873749/onvoard-webhooks
You can add webhooks to subscribe to events from OnVoard. To add a new webhook, login to organization owner and go to webhooks page.
To secure your endpoint, you can provide with a secret value and we will add X-Hub-Signature HTTP header to call webhook url.
This signature is generated with SHA1 using provided secret and request body. To validate request, compute expected signature on your end and compare it with X-Hub-Signature .
Below is a flask example on how to validate webhook request.
import hashlib
import hmac
import os
from flask import Flask, request, abort
@app.route('/webhooks/onvoard', methods=['POST'])
def index():
key = os.environ['WEBHOOK_SECRET']
request_signature = request.headers.get('X-Hub-Signature')
computed_signature = 'sha1=' + hmac.new(
key, request.data, hashlib.sha1).hexdigest()
if not hmac.compare_digest(computed_signature, request_signature):
abort(500)
Note
Use constant time string comparison function like Python's hmac.compare_digest instead of == for verification to prevent timing attack.
Why? == will stop comparing after the first character mismatch. This allows an attacker to brute force byte by byte your secret knowing that if they have a matching character, the comparison will take longer to finish execution. hmac.compare_digest is a constant time comparison function and will always take the same amount of execution time.
---
# Guide for Liquid Template Language
Topic: General | Section: Technical
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318672389/guide-for-liquid-template-language
OnVoard uses liquid template language by Shopify to generate dynamic content for personalization. Below are some tips for liquid template that you may find handy.
Working with Timezone
Most macros used by OnVoard will provide you with variable created_timestamp, which is a unix timestamp. When converted to datetime, it will always be converted to UTC timezone. In some cases, you may want to add some formatting to display time in your timezone.
Say we want it to be shown in Singapore time, which is UTC+8, we can add or subtract the appropriate time difference, and format it accordingly.
# 21 June 2019 at 22:05 (Singapore Time){{ created_timestamp | plus: 28800 | date: "%e %B %Y at %H:%M (Singapore Time)" }}
Another example, this time to show current time in your timezone. "now" is a special word that can be used to get current time.
# 21 June 2019 at 22:05 (Singapore Time){{ "now" | date: "%s" | plus: 28800 | date: "%e %B %Y at %H:%M (Singapore Time)" }}
See liquid date filter for more reference.
---
# How does selector placement work for widgets?
Topic: General | Section: Technical
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318543454/how-does-selector-placement-work-for-widgets
Selector placement allows you visually insert widgets into your site without any technical work. If you are not comfortable dealing with code, we highly recommend you to try using selector placement to insert widget.
When selector placement is selected, selector section will be shown. Click to Open Tool button to use placement tool.
OnVoard will automatically suggest url to open placement tool. You can also override the url to open with placement tool but it must be a url for your store.
1) On store's url, simply click on where you want the widget to be inserted.
2) To save insert location, click Save button on top right corner.
Go back and console and you should see CSS Selector field auto-filled based on your previous selection.
How to identify selector placement widgets?
Selector placement widgets will be denoted with data-placement-mode="selector" attribute.
How a selector placed widget look
How a custom placed widget look
It is important not to remove data-placement-mode="selector" attribute because that's how OnVoard identify selector placed snippets.
See Also
How does auto placement work for widgets?
---
# How does auto placement work for widgets?
Topic: General | Section: Technical
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318421838/how-does-auto-placement-work-for-widgets
When working with widgets, you may come across auto placement options to help you automatically install widget.
Even though it may not always work for every themes, using auto placement can greatly simplify the process of setting up widgets. There are a few things to note when working with auto placement.
How to identify auto placed widgets?
Auto placed widgets will be denoted with data-placement-mode="auto" attribute.
Here's how an auto placed widget look.
How a custom placed widget look
It is important not to remove data-placement-mode="auto" attribute for auto placed widgets because that's how OnVoard identify auto placed snippets. When you set a widget to inactive or delete it, OnVoard will use this signature to automatically remove it from your site.
For EasyStore merchants, you won't see any auto placed widgets inside your theme files. This is because EasyStore uses app snippets to dynamically load snippets. Thus you can ignore this section.
How will OnVoard automatically remove snippet?
Below are cases where OnVoard will automatically remove snippet.
When auto placement widget is set to inactive or deleted.
When auto placement widget switches to custom placement.
Below are cases where OnVoard will not automatically remove snippet.
When custom placement widget is created/updated/deleted.
When custom placement widget switches to auto placement.
In summary, auto installation and removal only happens for auto placed widgets. This is by design so that we don't accidentally remove any scripts that is manually installed by you. The code used for custom placement widgets will be treated like other code in your theme.
What if another same widget already exists in page?
If the existing widget uses custom placement, OnVoard will still automatically install auto placement widget.
If the existing widget uses auto placement, OnVoard will skip auto installation to prevent duplicate widgets.
See Also
How does selector placement work for widgets?
---
# GDPR Compliance
Topic: General | Section: Privacy and Terms
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319051085/gdpr-compliance
OnVoard has taken the necessary steps to become GDPR compliant.
Data Portability: See how you can export contacts personal data.
Right to Rectification: See how you can modify contacts data.
Right to be Forgotten: To erase data for your contacts, see how you can handle data deletion requests.
For more details, please check the following pages:
GDPR Notice
Privacy Policy
Data Processing Agreement
Feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com if you have any questions.
---
# Export Contacts Personal Data
Topic: General | Section: Privacy and Terms
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318828111/export-contacts-personal-data
You can use Console or API to export contacts personal data.
Export via Console
To export contacts information and properties, go to contacts page and click Export Contacts.
Export via API
You can also use OnVoard API to query contacts data. Tracked activities can also be queried via API.
---
# Handle Data Deletion Requests
Topic: General | Section: Privacy and Terms
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318471251/handle-data-deletion-requests
If you receive data deletion requests from your contacts, don't delete the contact since they may still be tracked if added back to the database.
Instead, you should suppress the contact. This will erase all personal data from contact and ensure that contact will not be tracked. You can also upload a list of emails you want us to suppress.
---
# Accepted Payment Methods
Topic: Billing | Section: Billing FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319314176/accepted-payment-methods
OnVoard charge via credit card payment. For Shopify merchants, billing will be handled by Shopify as app charges.
To update your credit card, go to subscriptions page.
---
# How do I upgrade my plan?
Topic: Billing | Section: Billing FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318764740/how-do-i-upgrade-my-plan
Follow steps below to upgrade subscription:
Login to owner account (the account used for sign up)
Go to subscriptions page and add payment method. For Shopify merchants, you don't need to add payment method.
Change app subscriptions to upgrade plan.
---
# How do I cancel subscription?
Topic: Billing | Section: Billing FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318570563/how-do-i-cancel-subscription
Go to Subscription page and click on Cancel Subscription on the app to cancel subscription.Keep in mind that after an app is cancelled, you will be billed until the end of current billing period.
---
# When will I be charged?
Topic: Billing | Section: Billing FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318338761/when-will-i-be-charged
OnVoard BillingNew PlansSubscription charges are prepaid so you will be charged the moment you upgrade. After that, you will be charged at the start of next billing cycle. For example, if you subscribe to monthly plan, your next charge will be 1 month from today.For sending emails, you will need to topup sending balance which will be charged separately from app subscriptions. This allows charges to be flexible according to your email sending volume.Legacy PlansSubscription charges are post-usage so you will be charged on 1st of each month for previous month usage. Thus, March usage will be charged on 1st April. Shopify BillingSince billing is handled by Shopify, you will be charged based on Shopify's billing cycle. For more details, please refer here.
---
# Will I still have access to my data after I cancel subscription?
Topic: Billing | Section: Billing FAQs
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318361390/will-i-still-have-access-to-my-data-after-i-cancel-subscription
Yes, you will still have access to existing data like contacts, emails, reviews even if you have cancelled subscriptions. You will also be able to export these data out of OnVoard.
---
# Usage Charges for Number of Active Contacts
Topic: Billing | Section: Usage Charges
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319541070/usage-charges-for-number-of-active-contacts
Note: Only applicable if your legacy plan charges by active contacts
Usage charges for active contacts is only applicable if you're on a legacy plan. Our latest pricing plan offers flat pricing regardless of number of contacts you have.
How are usage charges computed?
Chargeable number of active contacts is computed using the rolling average number of active contacts for the month. In another words, this is the average number of active contacts in your account throughout the month.
To estimate monthly usage, you can go to active contacts page and check current number of active contacts for your account.
After subscribing, you can view chargeable usage for number of active contacts via usages page.
2 key reasons why rolling average computation is used.
More Accurate
Instead of using the number of the active contacts at the end of the month, it is generally more accurate to compute usage based on the average numbers throughout the month.
Prevent Abuse
Another key reason for this approach is to prevent users from abusing our system and avoid paying for their actual usage. For example, bulk updating contacts to inactive at the end of month to avoid paying for active contacts.
---
# Usage Charges for Email Sends
Topic: Billing | Section: Usage Charges
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319160368/usage-charges-for-email-sends
If you are sending emails, you may incur additional charges depending on monthly email sends. In general, every email send via your account will count towards usage. After subscribing, you can view current email sends usage via usages page.
Current rate for email sends charges
$1 per 1000 email sends.
The following will not count towards usage.
Skipped email sends. Examples includes suppressed contacts, unsubscribed contacts, previously hard bounced contacts.
Errors that occurs before email sends. Examples includes inactive emails, missing email profiles, incorrect email configurations.
The following will count towards usage.
Test email sends.
Double Opt-In confirmation email.
Back-In-Stock email sends.
Review request email sends.
Emails that hard bounce after sends.
Emails that soft bounce after sends.
Emails that landed in spam inbox.
Attempted email sends after passing initial checks.
Monthly email sends usage will automatically resets on 1st of each month.
Free Trial Limits
Account on free trial will have 1000 email sends limits. This limit is for the trial period and will not be reset on 1st of each month.
---
# Usage Charges for Email Transit
Topic: Billing | Section: Usage Charges
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318999378/usage-charges-for-email-transit
If you are using your own SMTP provider account for sending, instead of email sends charges, you will incur email transit charges. Transit charges are cheaper than send charges since you still have to pay your SMTP provider email sends charges on your own. To simplify things. When you use your own SMTP provider account for sending, you will pay:
Your SMTP provider email sends charges on your own. This is not handled by OnVoard.
OnVoard for email transit charges.
Current rate for email transit charges
$0.50 per 1000 email sends.
Why do we charge transit charges?
Processing email events and logs is expensive and takes a toll on our server resources. Transit costs are required to cover the costs for handling these tasks.
Is using own SMTP provider account for sending more expensive?
It really depends. You have to calculate based on your estimated usage and the charges you pay SMTP provider.
---
# Billing for Shopify Merchants
Topic: Billing | Section: Shopify Billing
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319096270/billing-for-shopify-merchants
If you are Shopify merchants, billing will be handled by Shopify as app charges. You can view your OnVoard bills in Shopify admin billing.
Check if you are using Shopify Billing
Login to organization owner and go to subscriptions page.
It should state Shopify for Billed By.
If you see OnVoard for Billed By, contact us at support@onvoard.com and we'll help you convert.
---
# Payment Issue for Malaysian Debit Cards
Topic: Billing | Section: Troubleshooting
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_5574166278577/payment-issue-for-malaysian-debit-cards
Malaysian debit cardsBy default Malaysia-issued debit cards are not automatically activated for online payments. If a Malaysian debit card is used to make payment online but wasn't set up to allow online payments, the bank will decline the charge. Usually the error code associated with this decline is transaction_not_allowed.To resolve, please contact your bank to activate their debit cards for online purchases.For more details, see https://support.stripe.com/questions/declined-charges-on-malaysia-based-stripe-accounts
---
# PageFly Integration
Topic: Integrations | Section: Page Builder
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319678532/pagefly-integration
PageFly is a Shopify Page Builder app that currently serves more than 100.000 merchants and brings in a complete package to build high-converting stores with just simple drag-and-drop, no coding required, creating a seamless digital experience across devices.
Integrate Pagefly with OnVoard Back In Stock
Pagefly App Listing
---
# ⏰ Last Chance: All 7 OnVoard apps from $19.90/mo (Posted 07/11/2026)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_7968534615482/last-chance-all-7-onvoard-apps-from-1990mo-posted-07112026
Hope everyone had a good first half of 2026.We’re making a structural change to OnVoard’s pricing plans and will be retiring our All-In-One Plans after 25 July 2026.If you haven’t subscribed yet, this is the last chance to get access to all 7 OnVoard apps from $19.90/month before the plan is retired.For existing customers, as always, your current plan and pricing will be grandfathered. Nothing changes for you. You'll continue paying the same price while receiving new features, improvements, and updates. What worked for you yesterday will continue to work today, next week, and in the months ahead.OnVoard has been running for more than 5 years, and we have always honored existing plans for customers. I intend to keep it that way.As a small business owner myself, I understand how disruptive sudden vendor price increases can be. That’s why we’re making sure existing customers can continue using their current plans without being forced into the new pricing structure.Why are we retiring the all-in-one plan?The reason for this change is simple: OnVoard now supports more apps, more platforms, more features, and more usage than when the All-In-One Plans were first introduced. At the current price point, the plan no longer scales well for us in terms of infrastructure, product development, and support. At the same time, memory and storage prices have increased significantly, with many components now costing 2-3x more than they did a year ago. Our hosting vendor (which is one of the cheapest in the market) raised prices 2 times this year, and more than doubled the server prices recently in June.I’m currently pushing new releases every week, with more apps and major updates coming over the next few weeks and months. Moving forward, our pricing will better reflect the value and resources required to keep improving OnVoard.If you have any feature requests or app ideas, please feel free to reply and let me know. This is a great time to share feedback as I’m actively working on big OnVoard updates.Note: The public pricing page now shows our new pricing plans. If you’re a registered user, you can still view and subscribe to the legacy All-In-One Plans from your billing page until 25 July 2026.Recently released updatesMajor analytics improvements across platformsAccount-level email analyticsAttributed Revenue over Store Revenue reportingCross-App Revenue over Store Revenue reportingMarketing PlatformUpload assets once and reuse them across campaignsImage asset management features, including renaming and taggingReperksNow supports both rolling and fixed points expiryExpire points if they are unused after X daysFree product rewards, such as a $50 Visa gift cardFree product rewards can be added to cart with auto-applied couponsBack-In-StockAdded BIS metafields such as product waitlist count and bis_last_subscribed_atUse BIS metafields to create social proof elements, such as waitlist progress bars AOV Progress BarNow supports auto placement for Wix cart and cart drawerConfirmed upcoming featuresAOV Progress BarSchedulingGeotargetingConfetti effect when unlocked discount
---
# Updated Gmail and Yahoo sending requirements from Feb 2024 (Posted 01/14/2024)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922314398935/updated-gmail-and-yahoo-sending-requirements-from-feb-2024-posted-01142024
Both Google and Yahoo have additional requirements for email senders starting from February 2024.Updated gmail requirements for email sendersUpdated yahoo mail requirements for email sendersHow will the changes affect you?This will affect you if you are sending emails via OnVoard.For detailed explanation, you can refer to the above sender requirements links.To keep things simple in this email, we will only highlight the changes you need to make when sending emails with us. Other specified requirements like adding "List-Unsubscribe" header are already handled by us internally.Setup SPF and DMARC AuthenticationIf you are sending 5000 or more emails per day, you need to setup SPF and DMARC authentication. We recommend all email senders regardless of your sending volume to setup SPF and DMARC authentication so you will always stay in compliance with the sender requirements as your customer base grow.Setup SPF record for OnVoardSetup DMARC authenticationCheck your SMTP ProfilesWe've updated smtp profiles page with optional requirements and checks for SPF record and DMARC authentication.SPF record and DMARC will be shown as Valid if they are authenticated.Both are optional requirements, but email deliverability may be affected from Feb 2024 onwards if they are not fully authenticated.
---
# RenderKu, our Shopify App for Email Templates is now live (Posted 10/11/2023)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922306967491/renderku-our-shopify-app-for-email-templates-is-now-live-posted-10112023
Our new Shopify app RenderKu is now live on the app store.To illustrate the problem RenderKu is solving, go to Shopify notification settings page. Does your notification emails look similar to the ones used by millions of other Shopify stores?With RenderKu, you can easily upgrade and customize default notification emails with visually appealing email templates.Your store looks different from others, your emails should also be!How does the email templates look?RenderKu has 100+ pre-made templates you can use for notification emails. You can see them here. Below are some examples on how the default emails look VS using RenderKu templates.Order ConfirmationOrder Out for DeliveryGift Card IssuedNewsletter TemplatesRenderKu also have templates for newsletters that you can use for email marketing. Currently, there is a limited number of newsletter templates, but we'll slowly add them over time.PricingFree plan is available to try the templates and preview emails. Exporting html would require a paid plan.Pro plan is $144/year for annual subscription, equivalent to $12/mo. RenderKu is designed to be subscribed annually, thus annual plans are 4 times cheaper than monthly plans.RenderKu is a separate entity from OnVoard. It is not included in OnVoard's all-in-one plans.See pricing page.Let me know what you think.RenderKu will be continuously improved over time as we position it to be the Canva of emails.Go and give it a try. I would love to hear your feedback.See RenderKu in app store.See Shopify notifications email templates.
---
# Our production servers was suspended by Google Cloud (Posted 03/11/2023)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922099720337/our-production-servers-was-suspended-by-google-cloud-posted-03112023
The last 24 hours has been tough. As a 4 years customer, our production servers have been suspended by Google Cloud because we didn't fill up some information on-time.To be clear, it has been more than 24 hours and they still have not got back with a resolution. I managed to get our servers back online few hours ago with a workaround by adding a new billing account.Why were our servers suspended? Because we didn't fill up information in time?1) Google Cloud dropped us an email 10 days back that I missed out2) Titled "Important Information Regarding Your Google Account" with no indication of suspension or what in title. Basically you would have thought it was an informational email that doesn't require any action on your part.3) Given the number of subprocessor "Important" emails they send it's too easy to miss out the email.4) So 10 days gone by and our servers were abruptly shutdown with no suspension notification. They simply pulled the plug.So what information are we missing?The form can be viewed here. Basically they want us to provide identification documents. For us, we've already been paying and using the same credit card for the past 4 yrs. Only changed once when the card expire few months back but weren't told to provide any identification documents previously.Google Cloud have zero empathy for customersWe've always pay our bills on-time for the past 4 yrs consistently spending $400-$700/mo. Our servers were suspended not because of any fradulent related issue. It was suspended simply because of "some missing paperwork" that has been delayed. Since we were told to wait 24-48 hrs for their "trust and safety" team to verify our documents, I asked the support to at least temporarily reactivate our servers given the circumstances. But the support told us they have no access to do so.As of now, we are still waiting for them to reply. And if I haven't found a workarond, our servers would've been down for more than 24 hrs. It's beyond ridiculous how they treat the very customer who trusted them since the App Engine days. And it's obvious that their "trust and safety" team doesn't care or understand the urgentness of the matter.Moving ForwardStarting today, I will be making plans to move everything to AWS. It will take awhile since we have tons of code to change and also commitment usage with Google Cloud. But I will never ever run any production stuffs with Google Cloud again. You can't trust them with your business.How to get information updates for OnVoard?In this case we weren't able to broadcast email to everyone since we use our own platform for sending emails. To get timely notifications, you can follow us on facebook or twitter.
---
# New Pricing: 1st September 2022 (Posted 09/01/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922073898432/new-pricing-1st-september-2022-posted-09012022
We are making pricing changes for all our apps on 1st September 2022.Below is a quick note on changes in pricing.OnVoard will re-introduce individual app subscriptions.If you only need to use a single app, it will be cheaper to subscribe to that app instead of getting all-in-one subscription.Pricing for all-in-one subscription will be more expensive.There will be free plans available for all apps (except email marketing) but free plans will have limitations.This move is needed because I need to spend time improving the apps and at the same time, ensure that all support tickets get responded to promptly.View New PricingGold Subscription Promo (Available till 30th Sep 2022)For existing users, we are offering a one-time promo until 30th September 2022 so you get a better deal instead of switching to new pricing plans.The deal allows to subscribe to all our apps for $19/mo.This is a deal you won't find anywhere. No other vendor would offer email marketing + reviews + popup + loyalty + back-in-stock apps at this pricing.You can view the deal in subscriptions page.Existing Paid PlansAs usual, if you are already a paid user, your existing plan stays intact.
---
# XCollab: Our Brand Collaborations App will be Available Soon (Posted 08/04/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922065396782/xcollab-our-brand-collaborations-app-will-be-available-soon-posted-08042022
Our brand collaborations app, XCollab, will be available soon. I've just submitted the app to various ecommerce platforms and it should be available within a few weeks time. XCollab is a one of its kind app that enables Brand X Brand Collaborations for Ecommerce Stores. In short, here's a quick example of how the app work.Publisher merchant create campaign for advertiser deal to collaborate.When customers from publisher store spent at least $100 within a single order, they receive $10 off discount code for advertiser store.When customer use discount code at advertiser store, advertiser merchant acquires a new customer.Brand X Brand Collaboration allows advertisers to divert money spent on ads towards giving incentives to acquire new customers.In brand collaboration, everyone wins.Advertiser wins because they acquire new customers.Publisher wins because they can use promotion to increase AOV and boost conversion.Customer wins because they get exclusive discounts from partners.For now, you can have a quick preview of the app via the link below. Keep in mind that the app is still pending approval so campaigns won't be 100% functional but you can still setup, view and list your store on marketplace.View XCollab in ConsoleWhat's the story behind XCollab?Since I'm always tied up with work at OnVoard, ordering food delivery services is a common occurrence for me. So last month when I ordered from Ya Kun, I received this $5 voucher from Ya Kun X Amazon CollaborationYa Kun X Amazon CollaborationAnd it worked! The last time I shopped at Amazon.sg was more than a year ago and this Ya Kun X Amazon collaboration made me a return customer. So I thought wouldn't it be great if we can make brand x brand collaboration possible for merchants programmatically? It happens coincidentally that I have just completed my previous app and have time to clear backlogs or work on something new. Of course, curiously got the better of me and I spent the next month to work on XCollab and there you go, an app that enables Brand X Brand Collaborations for Ecommerce Stores.How does it work for Advertiser?Advertisers are merchants who offer deals to other merchants. They can offer discount codes like $10 OFF to customers from publisher stores. This allows advertisers to acquire high-intent purchasers at a low cost.View Advertiser GuideHow does it work for Publisher?Publishers are merchants who promote advertiser offers. What's the benefit of being a publisher? You can use partner offers to increase AOV and boost conversion. With advertiser offers, you can setup promotions like "Get $10 OFF at Advertiser Store when you spent at least $100". Best of all, there are no costs for you to setup these promotions!View Publisher GuideCollaboration WorkflowBelow is how merchants can collaborate to generate more sales.1) Advertiser Create DealsAdvertiser create deals and list them on marketplace. Deal can be public or private. Private deal allows you to setup exclusive offers with selected partners. Deals listed on marketplace will be available to publishers who can initiate a collaboration campaign.2) Publisher Create CampaignsPublisher can view marketplace and identify deals to collaborate. After identifying a deal to collaborate on, setup a campaign for it. You can structure the campaign such that only orders greater than $X will be eligible. This allows you to increase AOV.3) Advertiser ApprovalAdvertiser will be notified for campaign requests. They can then choose to either approve or deny it. XCollab will notify publisher approval status via email. If the campaign is approved, it will be ready to go live on scheduled dates.4) Run PromotionsBefore a campaign goes live, both merchants should promote brand collaboration on social media and email newsletter. This is a good way to boost revenue as it gives customers reasons to return to your store.5) Campaign PeriodDuring the campaign period, XCollab will automatically drop a post-purchase email with advertiser's discount code whenever customers from publisher store make a purchase. Emails will be delivered using publisher's email profile. Below is a quick walkthrough.Customer sees they can get "$20 OFF" at advertiser store if they ordered at least $100 from publisher store.Proceeds to place an order of $110 at publisher store. Publisher get to increase AOV.Receives post-purchase email with advertiser's discount code for "$20 OFF".Customer is thrilled with the discount and goes to advertiser store to place an order. Advertiser wins a new customer.6) Rinse and RepeatAfter campaign ends, find more collaborators or bring your own collaboration partner. Rinse and repeat to acquire customers at a low cost.Bring your Own PartnerHave a merchant that you want to collaborate with? Invite them to XCollab and setup a private deal with them! Publishers can always run campaigns on free plan.What is the Pricing for XCollab?You can collaborate as publisher on a free plan. This includes running campaigns and access marketplace.To collaborate as advertiser, you need a paid plan.Paid plan is at $29/month.A single subscription will provide you access to all 8 OnVoard apps.View SubscriptionGreat, how do I learn more about XCollab?See Setting up XCollab. Keep in mind that app is still pending approval so campaigns won't be 100% functional but you can still setup, view and list your store on marketplace. When app has been approved, you'll certainly be the first to know!
---
# Our New Rewards Loyalty App - Reperks (Posted 05/25/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922010587152/our-new-rewards-loyalty-app-reperks-posted-05252022
Great news! Our new rewards loyalty app, Reperks, is finally here. With Reperks, merchants can easily setup powerful and highly customizable rewards loyalty program to retain customers and increase lifetime value. You probably have seen other rewards loyalty app so I'll cut the chase and explain the key differentiator for Reperks.CampaignsOne of Reperks biggest differentiation is that merchants can easily setup campaigns to boost store engagement. This is something you will find very difficult to replicate with other rewards loyalty app. Below are examples of campaigns you can setup with ReperksSeasonal Campaigns: Give additional 100 points when customer spent more than $200 during month of AugustProduct Campaigns: Give additional 100 points when customer purchase any products with name containing "Jacket" during month of August.Bonus Campaigns: Give 100 bonus points when reviews are submitted with photo/video.Discount Code Campaigns: Give additional 100 points when customer placed an order of at least $100 and used discount code "100POINTSAUGUST".Milestone Campaigns: Give 500 points when customer hit $1000 lifetime spent with store.Key FeaturesZero Code Installation: One-click widget installation that just worksStyle Editor: Customize widget styles to match your brand.Email Notifications: Notify your customers on points changes.Members Profile: Identify high value customers and keep track of points activity.Points Adjustment: Use points adjustment to handle points change for custom rewards campaigns.Full Language Customizations: Translate widget to any languages, even Na'vi!Customize widget stylesFully translate to any languageUse campaigns to boost revenue in promotional periods. See Seasonal Campaigns and Product Campaigns.Great, how do I start with Reperks?1) Install Reperks AppFirst, install the reperks app for the following ecommerce platformsShopify App ListingEasyStore App ListingBigCommerce App ListingWix App Listing2) Setup ReperksAfter installation, go to Reperks Overview and follow instructions to setup.
---
# New Integration: Pagefly X OnVoard Back In Stock (Posted 05/13/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922003651081/new-integration-pagefly-x-onvoard-back-in-stock-posted-05132022
Great news for Shopify merchants. We are happy to announce that our back-in-stock app is now integrated with Pagefly. This integration allows Pagefly users to easily add back-in-stock triggers into page builder.PageFly is a highly-efficient tool to create well-designed pages to drive sales for your online store. Why let go of a tool that allows you to do so much. Whether you are a small or medium-sized business, or even a Shopify Plus brand, with PageFly, you can publish high-quality pages and manage your site with confidence and utmost control.OnVoard Back In Stock element for PageflyPagefly Shopify App
---
# 2022 Updates: Better Pricing, Affiliate & Agency Program (Posted 02/14/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921968096316/2022-updates-better-pricing-affiliate-agency-program-posted-02142022
Hope 2021 has been good for you folks. Below are great changes we just added yesterday to OnVoard.Better PricingThis is probably the most important change to take note. The new pricing would make it easier for you to estimate monthly charges. It will also be cheaper than our previous gold plan.Old Pricing$10 per month base price.Plus $5 for every 1000 active contacts.Plus $1 for every 1000 email sends.New Pricing$19 per month base price.Plus $1 for every 1000 email sends.Initial price is $29/mo but you can apply limited time code "EARLY10OFF" to get $10 off per month.In short, if you are not sending any emails, you will pay a flat rate of $19 per month. This is way better than the previous gold plan which will charge you more when you have more active contacts.This isn't an easy decision to make since it will dip OnVoard's revenue by around 20%. I am willing to absorb the loss and make this change because quite often, users drop us message asking us how active contacts are computed. Also, many users want to use 1 or 2 of our apps or aren't ready to fully switch over. For instance, it's hard to justify paying additional charges for active contacts if a user is only using prompt app. This pricing change is also an aggressive move to make it no-brainer for users to switch over to OnVoard.Existing Paid UsersAs usual, if you are already a paid user, your existing plan stays intact. It is totally up to you to decide if you want switch to this new plan. If you're on our previous gold plan that charges by active contacts, you most definitely would want to switch to this new plan.Switching to New PlanHere's a quick rundown on how you can switch to new plan.1) Go to subscriptions page.2) Look for Apply Coupon and use limited time code "EARLY10OFF" to unlock discounted plan.3) You should see a message saying that coupon has been added. Next, Edit Subscription. Choose Gold (Promo) to get discounted subscription.Affiliate ProgramIf you love OnVoard and would like to make money promoting us, you need to take a look at our affiliate program.What Your Referrals GetWith OnVoard's affiliate program, you can generate an affiliate link or coupon code to give your referrals $10/mo off their monthly subscription.What You GetIn return, you earn $10 for each referral that upgrades plus 20% ongoing commission.To get started as an affiliate, see affiliate program page.Agency ProgramIf you represent an agency, we would like to work with you.There are no fees to be OnVoard's agency partner.Your agency will be listed on our agency partners directory page (currently still empty so why not be the first). This will bring additional exposure and free leads for your business.Agency partner get 20% commission for all managed accounts.To get started as an agency partner, see partner overview page.Can I be both an affiliate and agency at the same time?Yes. Commission earned as an affiliate will be based on referred accounts while commission earned as an agency will be based on managed accounts. So if you run an agency and refer users to us, we will still attribute commission to you as an affiliate.
---
# New App: OnVoard Prompt (Posted 05/19/2021)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921926718256/new-app-onvoard-prompt-posted-05192021
Many merchants wonder why OnVoard didn't provide a lead capture tool for our email marketing app. The main reason for the hold-up is because I wanted to build an enterprise-level popup tool to elevate how our merchants collect leads and upsell products similar to standards set by the biggest ecommerce stores.After months of hard work, I am excited to announce that OnVoard is releasing Prompt, a generational product that reinvents what you can think you could create with pop-ups. Beyond the role of collecting leads, Prompt is pushing the limits of what you can accomplish with pop-ups by helping you to increase store revenue with cross-sell product recommendations.Here are some examples of Prompts that you can createWelcome new users with a discount code for their first purchase.Stop cart abandonment when a user with cart items tries to exit.Recommend frequently bought together products when user add cart item. Paired with OnVoard Recommender app.Display product recommendations like best selling, discounted items, recently viewed etc. Paired with OnVoard Recommender app.Other use casesCross-sell products when user initiate checkout.Collect feedback.Key FeaturesBelow are the key features for OnVoard Prompt.1) Full Customization with EditorMany pop-up vendors only allow you to customize content within a fixed template. With Prompt's editor, you can fully customize pop-ups from the ground up. Every row, column, and block can be customized. Merchants now have full control to craft pop-ups that match store design.2) Template LibraryDon't be daunted by the challenge of designing pop-ups from scratch. Pick one of our pre-built templates and click Save. That's how easy it is to get started.3) Powerful Filtering for SegmentationDisplay prompt to the right audience with our filtering tool. Some examples of how you can target users.Filter by Frequency - Generate less annoying pop-ups by showing to users who've not seen any pop-ups within the last X mins.Filter by Contact Properties - Winback customers by showing discount codes to logged-in users who've not placed any order within the last 90 days.Filter by Ecommerce Properties - Increase AOV by displaying upsell prompt if cart amount is below $100.Other filtering options:Behavior & Prompt ActivitiesCookieCustom PropertiesDevice typeLocationTime on sitePage depthVisitor typeURL & Referer URL4) Ecommerce TriggersTrigger prompt based on ecommerce activities on your site.Add Cart Item (Trigger) - When a user adds an item to the cart, display product recommendations like frequently bought together products to cross-sell.Initiate Checkout (Trigger) - When a user clicks on the checkout button, prompt them with product recommendations to increase average order value.How much does Prompt App cost?Prices are in US dollars. You can view full details on our pricing page.Free Plan ($0/mo)Up to 5,000 pageviews per month.Eligible for stores with up to 2000 products.Basic Plan ($15/mo)All features from Free PlanRemove powered by brandingUp to 30,000 pageviews per month.Eligible for stores with up to 2000 products.Growth Plan ($30/mo)All features from Basic PlanUp to 100,000 pageviews per month.Eligible for stores with up to 5000 products.Pro Plan ($65/mo)All features from Growth PlanUp to 300,000 pageviews per month.Eligible for stores with up to 30,000 products.Enterprise Plan ($145/mo)All features from Pro PlanUnlimited pageviews per month.All-In-One Plans (Starts from $25/mo)Subscribing to all-in-one plans will provide access to all OnVoard apps.If you are on our legacy all-in-one plan, Prompt app will be automatically included with no additional costs or any limitations. Give yourself a pat on the back because this is an amazing deal you've gotten yourself =).Do you have a live demo?Yes! See demo store . Add product to cart and view cross-sell recommendations.Okay, how do I start with Prompt?Install prompt app. [Shopify, EasyStore]Go to Prompt Overview and follow instructions to setup prompts. There will be templates available to help you setup within minutes.
---
# New App: Product Recommender (Posted 03/11/2021)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921893056609/new-app-product-recommender-posted-03112021
Great news! OnVoard is releasing a new product recommendation app. This app has been in the works for a few months and I'm super happy to be able to finally make this announcement.How can product recommendations help your store?Most users visit an online store without knowing what they want to buy beforehand. With product recommendations, you can suggests, guide, and convert these users into customers.For users that are already buying, product recommendations can help boost average order value (AOV) with cross-sell recommendations like "Frequently Bought Together" and "Customers Who Bought This Also Bought".Why use OnVoard Product Recommender?Below are 2 key reasons why you should use our product recommender app.1) 14 Types of Product RecommendationsOur product recommender app gives you instant access to over 14 recommendation logic for all product recommendation use cases. The best part? Every recommendation logic can be easily set up in a plug-and-play manner and you can easily display product recommendations at your store.Below are the types of product recommendations that we provide.Frequently Bought TogetherAlso BoughtSimilar ItemsRecently ViewedHandpicked ItemsBest SellingTrendingSelling FastSelling Out SoonNew ArrivalsDiscounted ItemsTop RatedRecently SoldRecently Reviewed2) Meta LabelsExisting product recommendations are boring. They simply stick product title and price onto the page without any other insights. When I started building our product recommender app, I knew that product recommendations can be much more vibrant and persuasive. Thus I've added meta labels to make product recommendations more compelling to end-users.Meta labels like 25% of customers bought this together serves as social proofs to convince customers WHY they should add the product to cart.Below are some other examples:Frequently Bought Together: 25% of customers bought this togetherAlso Bought: 7.6X more likely to buySelling Out Soon: 3 units leftNew Arrivals: Added 5 hours agoRecently Sold: Last Sold 3 hours agoHow much does Product Recommender cost?Supporter PlanYou can use all other OnVoard apps for free if you subscribe to Marketing Platform Standard Plan ($14.95/mo).Included apps:Back-In-StockReviewsProduct RecommenderStandard Plan$12.95/mo flat pricing.Do you have a live demo?Yes! Visit demo store and scroll to the bottom of the page to see product recommendations.Okay, how do I start with Product Recommender?Install product recommender app. [Shopify, EasyStore]Subscribe to product recommender app. Alternatively, you can contact us if you need us to extend your trial to try the product recommender app.Go to recommenders pageFollow setup guide.Upcoming Plans for Product RecommenderThe next step for product recommender is to integrate with our email editor and support product recommendations inside email. For example, use Also Bought recommendations in post-purchase emails to suggest products that users may have missed out. Or use New Arrival recommendations to automatically send monthly newsletters to your subscribers.These use cases present opportunities to increase your store revenue. Stay tuned for further announcements!
---
# New Apps: AOV Progress Bar + Back In Stock (Posted 10/12/2020)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921870327579/new-apps-aov-progress-bar-back-in-stock-posted-10122020
Hola, amigo. Quick updates on some new stuff we have at OnVoard.Brand New ConsoleI've rebuilt to OnVoard's Console to make things sleekier and easier for you to switch products. The main reason for the change was that the previous navigation layout can be confusing and overly cluttered as we add more products to OnVoard's brand.Before ChangeAfter ChangeNow, let's talk about the 2 upcoming products that we're adding.AOV Progress BarPrompt user to add more cart items to unlock discounts like free shippingThis is an interactive progress bar that changes whenever customers add or remove items from cart. The effect is to motivate customers to subconsciously add more items to their cart.The rule of thumb is to place progress bar in areas when there's "Add to Cart" button. This way, whenever a customers add a cart item, they will be prompt to fill up the bar.Back In StockCustomers can subscribe for back-in-stock notifications when products are out of stock.The average merchant loses 10% revenue from out of stock items. Our new back in stock tool helps merchants to recover these revenue by allowing customers to subscribe for back in stock notifications and automatically notifies them when your products are restocked.When will these 2 products be available?If you are running on EasyStore, good news for you! You can use these 2 new products right away.If you are running on Shopify, you probably will have to wait for at least a few days. We've submitted our apps for approval and it is currently pending review.Keen to get started? Go to catalog page and add these 2 new products.Other ImprovementsI've also added several improvements to OnVoard's platform.Recent activities in contacts managementUp to 3 most recent activities will be shown for each contactYou can now view recent activities for each contact via contacts management page without diving into individual contact profile.View Guide for Flow PlaybooksEach playbook comes with link to view guideEach flow playbook now comes along with a "View Guide" link to help you walk you through flow setup. This would save you time trying to dig up documentation for respective flow.Deduplicate Email Recipients for FlowTurn on to prevent sending duplicate emails to the same recipient.One of the most common mistakes I've seen in cart/browse abandonment flows is that merchants often forget to add a filter logic to skip recipients who've already received the same abandonment email. This means that if customers viewing 5 different products may end up getting 5 browse abandonment emails.To resolve this common issue, I've added deduplicate recipients option making it easy to exclude past recipients when sending out emails in abandonment flows.
---
# Introducing OnVoard as Email Marketing Platform for Ecommerce (Posted 07/08/2020)
Topic: Updates | Section: Announcements
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921855413731/introducing-onvoard-as-email-marketing-platform-for-ecommerce-posted-07082020
Today, I'm super excited to introduce V2 of OnVoard. This is a completely revamped version of OnVoard that I've been working on for the last 10 months.OnVoard is now an email marketing platform for ecommerce. Moving forward, OnVoard's key focus is to help merchants generate more revenue with minimal work by unleashing the full potential of marketing automations.Unlike many other email marketing vendors, OnVoard is built specifically for ecommerce merchants. Having this drilled-down focus allows me to build features that matter to ecommerce merchants.Key FeaturesBelow are key features of OnVoard that are newly added.Email EditorScreenshot for Email EditorThe drag and drop email editor allows you to customize email designs for your store within minutes. This email editor is purpose built from ground up for ecommerce merchants. It packs with ecommerce specific blocks like Product List, Reviews, and Star Rating.Embedding Reviews into Cart Abandonment EmailUsing OnVoard's email editor, you can seamlessly embed product reviews into your abandonment emails. This is one feature you won't find in any other email marketing platforms.Flow EditorScreenshot for Flow EditorFlow editor is our star for marketing automations. It is fully customizable and allows you to dictate how you want to automate your marketing in a set and forget manner. Obviously, all these buzz words would mean nothing if we can't pinpoint any concrete use case with it.Concretely, you can use flows to automatically:Recover users who've abandoned checkouts.Retarget users who've added cart items but didn't checkout.Retarget users who've viewed products but didn't checkout.Sent a birthday email.Sent review request after an order has been fulfilled.Follow-up with coupon discount email after user leaves a review.Sent reviewer a notification email after their review has been replied.To make things even better, we have preset configurations for these flows that already does 90% of the setup work for you.Screenshot for Flow PlaybooksSimply select playbook to use and make further adjustments from there.Reviews CollectionThere are many cracks in existing solutions for collecting product reviews.Most require you to use a preset template for review request email. You can't fully control the design of your email.Workflows are rigid and lack intelligence. You can't do things like show a different email (with discount coupon) if a user spends more than $1000.Example of review request email generated from email editor.These are issues that OnVoard is ironing out. When you use OnVoard to collect product reviews, you get to fully control:Review request emailAudience to sendIntervals between each sendScreenshot for Reviews CollectorReviews collector page can be used to collect product/site reviews. In most scenarios, you would direct users from review request emails to collector page.Reviews WidgetScreenshot for Reviews Widget EditorOur reviews widget provides a clean and intuitive user interface to help you sell more with product reviews. It also supports image and video upload for review submission. Also, take a look at the following demo stores for live examples on how reviews widget looks like.Shopify DemoEasyStore DemoPricing DetailsUse our pricing calculator to check estimated monthly cost.OnVoard uses a simple pay-as-you-go pricing structure. There are no features locking gimmicks that require you to upgrade to higher tiers. Every plan gets access to all platform features. You are charged based on the number of active contacts.Free Plan: Can add up to 200 active contacts and send up to 1000 emails per month.Pro Plan: $15/month for every 1000 active contacts.Give it a tryIf you have an existing OnVoard account, login to check out these new features. Otherwise, register for an OnVoard account and run a test drive. Be sure to check out the getting started guide.
---
# Steal Good Emails from Top Stores 💌 (Posted 01/22/2024)
Topic: Updates | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922320483528/steal-good-emails-from-top-stores-posted-01222024
Your Chance to Steal Good Emails from Top Stores 💌Over the past few months I've also started WhoSentWhat, a new project to collect email inspirations from top ecommerce stores. Now merchants like you can find inspirations for different kinds of emails like Birthday, Last Chance, Gift Guide, Welcome etc. See the email you like? WhoSentWhat allows you to save the email in your own collection.You can also see how the top ecommerce stores use email marketing to drive more revenue.For example, Caden Lane use eye-catching subject lines for their emails with bold usage of emojis to increase open rates.☝️Don’t Forget!!!📸You Look CUUUTE!!!!Oops! Forget this? 🎁🗓️🙁We're Closing SoonGo to WhoSentWhat 💌 and steal some good emails!
---
# Using OnVoard to Host Customer Stories Page (Posted 07/30/2019)
Topic: Updates | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921836167254/using-onvoard-to-host-customer-stories-page-posted-07302019
Most businesses aren't exactly tapping on to the full potential of their customer stories. Why? Most of them treat customer stories like blog posts, hoping that it will get picked up by prospects via search engines.That's not exactly bad, but what if your prospect can go to your customer stories page and search for success stories of companies similar to them. In other words, you need to make customer stories searchable on your site. Stories should be searchable by keywords, filterable categories, or better yet, both. This is necessary because the importance and usefulness of your services may differ based on traits like industry, region, and company size.It is not a coincidence that large organizations recognize the importance of making customer stories searchable.Google Cloudhttps://cloud.google.com/customers/What we likeGoogle Cloud offers more than 20 different products for their customers. Having the option to filter specific products allows one to easily search for the solution they care about.What we don't likeMissing keyword search - Having the ability to search by a specific brand would make experience even better. Then again, this can be easily done via it's parent company with "gojek google cloud customer stories".Clouderahttps://www.cloudera.com/about/customers.htmlWhat we likeCloudera is a big data vendor disrupting how enterprise manage their data assets. As such, being able to filter by industry is a key feature for them. Also, the option to search by keyword is certainly useful for users to search by organization names.What we don't likeRedundant Sorting - They provide "A-Z" and "Z-A" which I think is kind of unnecessary. Your users aren't going to paginate through all 100 pages, so what's the point of providing an option to sort by alphabets.Lack of filtering options - For the enterprise clients that they serve, it would be handy to allow filtering by region.NetApphttps://customers.netapp.comWhat we likeNetApp is a vendor that provide data services and management for the hybrid cloud. Most of their clients are enterprise users that need to store data in the on-premise environment.NetApp customer stories page is one of the best that we've seen. They have plenty of filtering options available which is useful. You can also sort by recent customer stories which I think can be handy if you are only interested in recent examples.What we don't likeNothing much.How to use OnVoard to Host Customer Stories Page?As you can see, building a searchable customer stories page isn't as easy as how it seems to be. Let's see how you can use OnVoard to simplify this by building and hosting your customer stories page without writing any code.Step 1: Add Story SiteAdding Story Site (OnVoard Console)The first step would be to add a story site via OnVoard Console. There are 2 layout options available for your story site, Organization or Person. Visually, the 2 layouts will display stories differently.If you are:B2B company using the site for customer stories, select Organization.Using the site for employee stories, select Person.Layout can't be modified on a later date so you need to decide at creation what kind of stories the site would be used for.There are also a wide variety of customization options for your story site:Customizable components like logo, favicon, header, footer, and navigation linksTheme colors according to your brandCustom domain for branded url like customers.yourdomain.comFeatured StoriesFilterable CategoriesWhat about hosting options?There are various options to host story site. Below is a list starting from least to most technical work required.By default, we will use OnVoard's domain to serve story site with url like onvoard.io/stories/acmeYou can use custom domain to serve via branded url like customers.yourdomain.comEmbed customer stories to your existing pageUse API to fetch stories data and fully customize how stories will be shown on your site.Step 2: Add Story CategoriesStory categories and valuesAdd story categories via OnVoard Console if you want to be able to filter stories by attributes like regions and industries.Step 3: Add StoryRich text editorThe final step would be to add your story. You will be provided with a rich text editor to add your story, making it simple like adding a new blog post.Story attributes. For category, we'll automatically use it for search filtering as well.You can also include additional details to make your story more compelling.Representative DetailsFeatured QuoteHero ImageAttributesStory OptionsAfter story has been created, you will be provided with a list of options to work with story. We'll highlight 2 key options.Changing sort order for storyReorder Story - Sorting stories by alphabetical order doesn't make any sense. Hence all stories are sorted in a custom order. You can reorder story to change its sort order.Preview of generated PDF. View PDF demoView PDF - OnVoard will also automatically generate PDF for story after modifications have been made. This may be handy if you are presenting to enterprise users.Final OutputView live demoThis is a preview of how generated customer stories page looks like. Not too shabby right?View live demoThis is a preview of how generated story articles page looks like.As you can see, OnVoard Stories is specially crafted to help you build aesthetically pleasing customer stories page without any coding. More importantly, you can now make your customer stories searchable and better than customer stories page used by many other large organizations. Considered building all these by yourself, think again my friend.
---
# Programmatically Conduct Customer Interviews with Pre-Specified Questions (Posted 07/25/2019)
Topic: Updates | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921809726467/programmatically-conduct-customer-interviews-with-pre-specified-questions-posted-07252019
What's one thing that always shows up on a B2B sales deck? Customer Stories!The significance of case studies and customer stories can't be understated if you want to influence buyers behavior. Customer interviews are generally conducted via these 3 approaches:Email Interview - Interviewer will send questions over email and interviewee will respond and reply with answers.Virtual Meeting - Both parties will arrange a time for virtual meeting over conference or video call.Field Trip Interview - Both parties will arrange a physical meetup for interview. In some cases, there may also be an arrangement to produce a professional video to make the story more convincing. This is the most expensive and time-draining interview approach that may not be viable for most smaller companies.In this post we'll be discussing about email interview, what are the challenges and how to resolve it.Challenges in Conducting Customer Interviews over EmailAlthough being more cost-effective compared to other approaches, there are still some challenges that one may encounter when they're conducting customer interviews over email.Identifying Users for Customer InterviewsTo begin with, you shouldn't be sending interview requests unless you know that the user is happy with your service. User segmentation should always be done before hitting the send button. The easiest way to segment users would be to use NPS survey. Other methods like CSAT after the closure of support ticket can be used as well.Getting More InterviewsIn general, the more customer stories you have, the stronger your case would be when it comes to influencing buyer's behavior. The best scenario would be a prospect being able to see the full benefits of your products based on stories from similar companies.Since interviews require your clients to put in some of their time, it may be useful to add some incentives or rewards to thank them for their effort. Ultimately, if you want to fully optimize the take-up rate for customer interviews, there should be something more just goodwill in your modus operandi. This can be backlinks, Amazon gift cards, discount coupons, or even monetary rewards.Lack of ClarityDon't get me wrong. Emails will always be important when you are communicating with your users. However, when there are multiple revisions for interview content, you may find yourself stuck in heavily nested email threads. In the end, you may need to dig through multiple email threads to locate the final version of interview content.A better approach would be to use a collaborative editor as single source of truth for interview content. Email can still be used for communication but main changes should be done within the editor. The editor should also support rich text formatting so that things like quotes, images and videos can still be used for interview.Lack of Organized StructurePreview of Trello boardJust like in the case for CRMs, you may want to have an overview of stages and progress for all interviews. Email clients are generally unsuitable for this so consider using Trello board or something similar. Whatever solution you choose, it should be able to store interview details and present these information in a way that makes it easy for the end-user to digest.Let's see how we can use OnVoard Interviews to tackle these challenges and make the process more efficient.Step 1: Setting up Interview RequestersWe'll be using OnVoard's interview requester tool to send interview request emails and get recipients to participate in customer interviews.Preview for Interview QuestionsFor interview requester, you would need to include a list of questions that will be used for interview.Similarities with Review RequesterBoth interview and review requesters shares some similarities in setup:You can also attach rewards to interview requester to motivate recipients to participate in customer interview. The key advantage over review requests is that you are no longer limited to sites that allow incentivization.Deduplication window is also available to prevent OnVoard from sending interview requests to the same email address. And just like review requester, we recommend specifying deduplication window if you are using automations to send interview requests.How Interview Requester Creates InterviewBelow is a breakdown of how interview requester can be used to create interview.Preview of interview request emailAfter created, you can use requester to send interview request to the user. This can be done manually via console, in bulk via CSV uploads, or with automation.Notice to indicate that OnVoard has dropped them interview instructions emailRecipient can opt-in their interest by clicking on email link. The link will bring them to a page with a notice indicating that we have dropped them an interview instructions email. Simultaneously, OnVoard will create a new interview for the recipient.Interview instructions emailThis is how the interview instructions email looks like. Interview will be locked from public access and can be accessed with passcode.Preview of InterviewUser can update interview questions with their answers and apply for rewards within a single page. Updated content will serve as a single source of truth for interview.Interviews Page (OnVoard Console)Inside OnVoard Console, you can have an overview of stages and progress for all interviews.Step 2: Automate Sending of Interview RequestsWhile interview request email can be manually sent via OnVoard's console, most users would prefer automating the process. There are various options available for this and we'll guide you through each of them.In-Survey Interview RequestPreview of In-Survey Interview RequestSimilar to review request, you can use survey actions to ask for interview at the end of survey. Survey rules can be used to conditionally route to interview request action based on the provided answer. For example, only show interview request if respondent rated 9 or above for NPS survey.Survey Respondent WorkflowBoth this and the previous approach relies on surveys to trigger sending of interview request. The difference is that the former would ask of interview request within the survey, while survey respondent workflow would be sending interview request to respondent's email inbox directly if preset conditions are met.Adding workflow conditionsAdding workflow actions. Interview requester will also be selected for sending.Lag Window (up to 7 days) can be specified so that interview request doesn't look automated to recipients.Interview Requester TriggersTriggers can be set up to automate sending of interview requests. Unlike previous approaches, the only prerequisite for this is interview requester. Triggers are versatile and can be used along with both internal and external integrations.For example, you can use triggers to automatically send interview request to:Users from Mailchimp segments.Recipients of review request who have applied for rewards. These are a group of users who have shown their willingness to write for your brand. At OnVoard, we call them Incentivized Reviewers.Multi-Pronged Approach for Interview RequestTo take things further, you can adopt a multi-pronged approach for interview request by using a combination of methods for sending. For this to work, it is imperative that you include deduplication window for interview requester setup so that OnVoard won't be sending duplicate interview request emails to the same recipient.Here's a detailed illustration for interview request lifecycle and how different components can work together to automate sending of interview requests.Day 1 (Review Request)User is shown NPS survey via web widget.Responds to survey by rating 9 for NPS.Survey rules conditionally route user to in-survey review request.User input email johndoe@example.com and opt-in for review request.Review request email arrives at inbox.User proceeds to leave a review via email link and apply for review reward. User is now considered as an incentivized reviewer.Day 3 (Incentivized Reviewer)Business fulfilled rewards for incentivized reviewer.Day 8 (Interview Request)Interview requester trigger is triggered to automatically send interview request to incentivized reviewer 5 days after rewards has been fulfilled.Interview request email arrives at inbox.User indicated his interest by clicking on email link.Interview instructions email is dropped to inbox. At the same time, interview is created for user.User proceeds to answer interview questions via link from interview instructions email.Day 10 (Deduplication)Another trigger is triggered to send interview request to users from Mailchimp segments.OnVoard will skip recipient (johndoe@example.com) based on deduplication window (100 days).As you can see, when deduplication window is configured, workflows for interview request can be easily customized according to your use case.What's NextThis brings us to the end of our guide on how you can programmatically conduct customer interviews with pre-specified questions. For our next post, we'll talk about using OnVoard to power your customer stories page.
---
# A better way to use social proof notifications on your website (Posted 10/21/2019)
Topic: Updates | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921739299894/a-better-way-to-use-social-proof-notifications-on-your-website-posted-10212019
Many websites these days add social proof notifications with the intent to boost their overall conversion. The surge in demand has sparked a rise in many social proof notifications vendors starting to appear in this space. Unfortunately, many of them are blatant clones and doesn't really bring anything new to the table (except perhaps for a lower price point).What's lacking in social proof notifications that we see today?Skipping the point of being an annoyance to consumers (since it heavily depends on one's implementation), social proof notifications today aren't exactly trustworthy.Measured and verified by the social proof vendorHere's an example I've crafted showing how most social proof notifications look like today. While it looks good in my eyes (Can't possibly trash my own design work :p), I'm not entirely convinced with how reliable the claim stats are. Which brings me to my next point.Are there social proof vendors that allow you to "fake" stats?The answer is Yes. Unfortunately, if you allow users to input their own stats, a small number of dishonest users will abuse the system and use it to create fake scarcity. Given the resemblance in designs for social proof widgets these days, I wouldn't be surprised if the effectiveness of social proof notifications starts to plummet when consumers start to doubt the trustworthiness of these notifications.One example of a social proof vendor that allows you to add custom notifications is Beeketing. If you don't know, Beeketing is one of the most popular apps on Shopify's App Store before being ban from Shopify. Essentially, Beeketing provides store owners with an interface to easily add custom notifications with any customer information they fill in. There are no measurements or verification involved to ensure the authenticity data.While I don't think Beeketing has any ill intent when they build this feature, it only takes a few dishonest users to make Shopify realize that they need to step in to protect the end consumers from misleading advertisements. Here's a more detailed account of the whole Beeketing X Shopify incident.Here's an interesting thing. After their not-so-amiable departure from Shopify, the folks from Beeketing came up with Shopbase, an e-commerce platform that unsurprisingly, competes against Shopify.Verifying facts is hardIn reality, verifying facts is hard. The way most Fintech companies and Facebook does to verify a person or business is to require them to upload a unique identification document. And this process may require tons of manual work for the whole approval process. For claimed social proofs like "Bob just bought Batman T-Shirt 5 mins ago", it may be better to prevent businesses from adding their own custom notification.When it comes to persuasion marketing, trust and credibility are the fundamentals. If your user doesn't trust your business practices, you can forget about everything else.How can we make social proof notifications more trustworthy?1) Display evidence of social proofs whenever you can.View Reviews goes to the actual Facebook listingThis is the best way to verify any social proof notifications. When you make a statement that you are rated 4 from 72 reviews on Facebook, the best way to build trust upon this social proof is to provide a direct link to the actual Facebook listing.2) Use authority platforms for measurementsWhat does Verified by OnVoard means? How is it being verified?One problem with "Verified" data from many existing social proof notifications is that they're generally measured and verified by the social proof vendor themselves. The problem here is that the social proof vendor being paid by businesses isn't the most reliable source when it comes to measurements or verification of facts.Instead of having the social proof vendor to measure and verify the facts, a better approach would be to tap into existing platforms that businesses are already using.Powered by OnVoard with Data from Google AnalyticsWhat do I mean? Businesses, in general, are already using authority platforms like Google Analytics, Stripe, and Shopify that provide some sort of social proof stats. For example:Page views from Google AnalyticsNumber of sign-ups (conversions) from Google AnalyticsNumber of sales and customers from StripeNumber of sales and customers from ShopifyThis approach means that the social proof vendor's responsibility would be to serve the notifications and fetch data directly from authority platforms. Since there's a clarity that social proof stats derive from an authority platform, social proof notifications would be more trustworthy to the consumer. It's not a foolproof solution, but it's much better than having the social proof vendor act as the arbiter of truth.Free Social Proof ToolAt OnVoard, we know that social proof notifications can be much better than what we're seeing today. I think we can help small businesses to improve their conversion rates with more credible social proof notifications. This is why we're making our flagship social proof tool, Notifiers, available for free with no limits or charges.If you like our approach for social proof notification, then check out OnVoard Notifiers.Persuasion Marketing used in this articleReciprocity Principle By giving away our social proof tool for free and help users to grow their business, they may be happy to recommend OnVoard to their friends or write up about us.Commitment & Consistency Getting users to make an initial small commitment to use OnVoard paves the way for them to try OnVoard's other products.
---
# Automatically Send Review Request Email to NPS Promoters (Posted 07/22/2019)
Topic: Updates | Section: Guides
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921726962284/automatically-send-review-request-email-to-nps-promoters-posted-07222019
One of the main advantages of using OnVoard is that our products are all deeply integrated, allowing you to easily set up automations based on preset conditions.Using NPS surveys to automatically send review request emails is one of the most commonly used playbook for OnVoard users. This is also the playbook we recommend users to start with when they're new to OnVoard. The idea of this automation would be to drop review request email to users who are likely to recommend your products. More specifically, users who have rated 9 or above for NPS survey.Step 1: Setting up OnVoard SurveysTo start, you would first need to set up surveys. OnVoard supports 4 different types of surveys.Web SurveyPreview of how web survey widget looks likeThese are survey widgets that will be embedded to your website. Since widget may be interruptive to the user, we recommend limiting the number of questions to keep the survey short and easy to complete.One-Click Email SurveyPreview of how one-click email survey looks likeThese are email surveys that can be answered with one click. Only one question can be specified. Question type must also support the mode of being able to be answered with a single click. As such, only rating and single selection type question can be used.Email SurveyPreview of email survey.These are email surveys that are commonly used by survey software vendors like SurveyMonkey. User clicks on email link and gets redirected to a site with all survey questions. Redirected site will be similar to the one used for Link Survey.Link SurveyPreview of link surveySurveys that will be distributed via url link. OnVoard will host and display all survey questions on the redirected site.Survey Question TypesAt least 1 question must be specified for your survey. The following question types are available:Single Selection - Question with single selected answer. Will use radio buttons.Multiple Selections - Question with multiple selected answers. Will use checkbox.Single-line Text - Question with 1 line answer. Will use input.Multi-line Text - Question with multi-line answer. Will use textarea.Email - Question that requires email as answer.URL - Question that requires url as answer.Rating - Question for 1-10 rating scale answer. This is commonly used for NPS survey.Survey ActionsAction will be executed at the end of survey. Each survey must specify a default action to use. You can add multiple actions and use rules to conditionally route to them.List of available survey actions:Notice - Show notice at the end of survey. This is used when you want to display thank you message .Call to Action - Show call to action button and direct user to another site at the end of survey.Redirect URL - Automatically redirect user to another url. This will not be available for web survey.Review Request - Ask user if they would mind leaving reviews at the end of survey. The difference between this and Call to Action is that you can attach incentives and rewards for completion of reviews. If you don't intend to incentive users for leaving reviews, use Call to Action instead.Interview Request - Ask user if they would mind participating in customer interview at the end of survey. Used when you want to get more customer stories.Example of Call-to-Action at the end of web surveyWe'll talk more about survey actions and how to fully utilize its capabilities.Step 2: Setting up Review RequestersWe'll be using OnVoard's review requester tool to send emails to survey respondents to try and get them to write reviews.Customizing brand colors for emailEmail message can be customized and layout can be themed according to your brand colors.Review RewardsEmail will provide a link for users to apply for rewardsFor many, writing reviews can be a bothersome task. You may want to attach incentives to show your appreciation to users for taking their time off in writing reviews.User can fill in details to apply for rewardsUsers can apply for rewards by themselves in a self-serve manner. This workflow is much more organized than requiring them to email you back (for rewards redemption) after they've left their review.A few things to keep in mind when attaching rewards to review request.Only attach rewards for sites that allow incentivization.Don't buy positive reviews. Instead, use rewards to encourage your users to write authentic reviews that reflect their actual experience.Deduplication WindowWhen setting up review requester, number of days can be specified to lookback and deduplicate. This prevents the system from sending review requests to the same email address. Deduplication window is necessary if you are using automations and want to avoid spamming your recipients' inbox with the same email.Sending review request emails can be done manually for each recipient but let's make full use of automations to handle these mundane tasks.Step 3: Automatically send review request based on NPS surveyThis is where the fun begins. We'll walk you through on how you can trigger sending of review requests based on survey response.In-Survey Review RequestReview Request within a Web Survey WidgetYou can use survey actions to request for reviews at the end of survey. The example shown above is an illustration of how a review request looks like within a web survey widget. Other survey types like link survey will have a different outlook but the gist is that you can prompt the user to write reviews at the end of the survey.Adding a survey rule to conditionally route to review requestOf course, in the case of an NPS survey, we may only want to request for reviews if the respondent rated us 9 or above. For this, we can use survey rules to conditionally route to specific action based on the respondent's answer.Survey Respondent WorkflowAnother way to automatically send review request based on NPS is to use survey respondent workflow. The key difference between this and the previous approach is that we'll be sending review request to respondent's email inbox directly.Adding workflow conditionsAdding workflow actions. In this case, we'll need to specify review requester to use for sendingFor this approach, a Lag Window (up to 7 days) can be specified so that review request doesn't look automated to recipients.Multi-Pronged Approach for Review RequestBoth methods that we've shown earlier are not mutually exclusive. You can adopt a multi-pronged strategy for review request by using both in-survey review request and survey respondent workflow.For this to work correctly, you would need to specify deduplication window (that we've mentioned earlier) for review requester to avoid sending the same review request email to recipient's inbox.Below we shall briefly illustrate how review request lifecycle looks like:Example: Using Deduplication Window to avoid multiple sendsDay 1User is shown NPS survey via web widget.Responds to survey by rating 9 for NPS.Survey rules conditionally route user to in-survey review request.User input email johndoe@example.com to opt-in for review request.Review request email arrives at inbox.User proceeds to leave a review via email link and apply for review reward.Day 3Workflow is triggered to automatically send review request to survey respondent after 2 days.Recipient (johndoe@example.com) is detected as someone who has recently received review request. Will be excluded from sending based on specified deduplication window (100 days).Example: Cross channel review request via web and emailDay 1User is shown NPS survey via web widget.Responds to survey by rating 9 for NPS.Survey rules conditionally route user to in-survey review request.User gets distracted and close survey window.Day 3Workflow is triggered to automatically send review request to survey respondent after 2 days.User receive review request email but didn't open the email since he was on vacationDay 10Reminder email arrives at inboxDay 11User return from vacation. Checks his inbox and found that his favorite online store has dropped him a review request.Proceeds to leave a review via email link and apply for review reward.On top of OnVoard's internal automations, our Zapier integration can be used to connect with over 1000 other apps to trigger sending of surveys and review requests. Our products are built to be extensible, so you can still use your existing survey software vendor to trigger sending of review request with OnVoard.What's NextHopefully, this guide will serve as a guide on how you can automate the process of sending NPS surveys and review requests. In the next post, we'll bring the game to the next level and walk you through on how you can use surveys to programmatically conduct customer interviews.
---
# Beautify your transactional emails with free templates ✨ (Posted 01/29/2024)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921613562251/beautify-your-transactional-emails-with-free-templates-posted-01292024
Great news! Our companion app, RenderKu, now allows you to export emails for free. You can now export emails on RenderKu's free plan. Previously, exporting emails require a paid subscription. Now we've made it available for all users.Cheaper Pricing, Better Free PlanWe've also updated pricing plans to make it cheaper for everyone. Monthly paid plan now starts from $12/mo instead of $48/mo. And you get 50% off at $6/mo if subscribed annually.Free plan is also better with same features as paid subscription. The only limitations for free users now is that you can create up to 2 emails. This means that you can now fully test your emails by exporting it before deciding if you want to upgrade to a paid subscription.What this means for you?This means that you can now beautify your ecommerce transactional emails with free templates. RenderKu has 100+ pre-made templates you can use for ecommerce transactional emails.View Shopify Notification TemplatesView BigCommerce Notification TemplatesBelow are some examples on how the default emails look VS using RenderKu templates.Order ConfirmationOrder Out for DeliveryGift Card IssuedTry our new free plan and level up your transactional emails now!Go to RenderKu WebsiteGo to RenderKu's Shopify AppGo to RenderKu's BigCommerce App
---
# New Back-In-Stock App Features (Posted 09/03/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922086161630/new-back-in-stock-app-features-posted-09032022
We've just added 2 new features for our back-in-stock app, rich text editor for email and sync subscribers.Rich Text Editor for EmailPreviously the email body only support plain text. A few merchants requested for rich text editor and thus I've added updated email body to use rich text editor.Sync SubscribersSync subscribers allows you to sync users who've subscribed for back-in-stock notifications to your ecommerce or marketing platform. Below are supported sync integrations.Built-InOnVoard ContactWebhookMarketing PlatformsMailchimpKlaviyoOmnisendEcommerce PlatformsShopifyBigCommerceWixTo sync subscribers,Go to connections page and connect to platform (if required).Edit Back-In-Stock config.Then select Sync tab.On top of that we also provide sync logs that you can use to view sync status.Like these new features?Why not leave a quick review for OnVoard? Takes only 1-3 minutes.
---
# Introducing Reperks Marketplace (Posted 07/14/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922046959624/introducing-reperks-marketplace-posted-07142022
Finally, it's time to reveal this secret. Since the beginning, Reperks app was never built to be yet another rewards loyalty program. Our key focus for Reperks has always been Partner Rewards.And now I'm happy to introduce Marketplace, an additional revenue channel for merchants to increase store revenue with zero maintenance. This will be used to power partner rewards.View MarketplaceIn short, Marketplace allows you to buy/sell discount codes (aka "deals") with other ecommerce merchants. You can participate in Marketplace as buyer, seller, or both.Reperks have 2 main products, Marketplace and Loyalty.As Marketplace SellerSelling deals creates an additional revenue channel for your store.Having this new channel also allows you to acquire new customers with minimal costs.This is in some ways similar to Groupon but you get full control over deals pricing and terms.Since you have full control over deals pricing, you can structure it such that every deal sold will be profitable for your store.It should take no more than 30 mins to setup. After that, there's literally zero maintenance since trades and redemptions are all handled automatically by Reperks.If your ecommerce platform doesn't support auto-generated coupons, then you would need to manually upload coupons for usage.Preview of Marketplace listingsView Seller GuideAs Marketplace BuyerYou can add deals from Marketplace and use them as partner rewards for loyalty program.What do banks and airlines have in common to retain customers? A rewards program that supports partner rewards.Rewards program used by ecommerce merchants today merely supports in-store rewards, which can be unattractive to customers. Your loyalty program is not going to convince customers to place their next purchase if they don't see the appeal in rewards. By adding partner rewards, customers will find loyalty points more applicable and make more repeat purchase from your store.Preview of how Partner Rewards looksView Buyer GuideHow do Reperks make money from this?Currently, everything is free. I want to make sure Reperks can help bring in additional revenue for merchants before even thinking about charging. In the future, the plan is to take around 10%-20% revenue share from deals sold by sellers.Why I'm focusing on Reperks?Our goal with Reperks is to create an additional revenue channel for merchants by solving the problem of distributing deals. Why is this a great untapped opportunity? Let's look at where we can distribute your deals and coupon codes.Partner Rewards for Online StoresThere are millions of online stores today and no one is offering partner rewards yet. This presents a great opportunity for marketplace buyers to make their rewards catalog more attractive and at the same time, opens up a huge potential market for marketplace sellers. Instead of spending advertising dollars to acquire new customers, why not partner with another merchant to bring in new customers in a cost-efficient manner.Best of all, these are customers with higher lifetime value (LTV) and have shown willingness to spend online. Why do I say that? For a customer to redeem partner reward, they probably need to spend a certain amount of money before they're qualified for redemption. Thus, compared to one-time purchasers, this segment of customers has a higher value.Rewards Catalog for Other PlatformsDo you know companies spent $46 billion a year on employee rewards? Most rewards are given out as vouchers and are used on large online stores like Amazon since recipients don't have many choices for redemptions. Independent online stores have literally zero presence in rewards catalog. Our goal with Reperks is to get your store's logo there. This is something Reperks will be working on in the future.Beyond employee rewards. there are many other rewards catalogs and opportunities for us to distribute your deals. These includes survey platforms, affiliate/referral platforms, custom rewards program (banks, airlines), e-gifts etc.Great, how do I start with Marketplace?For marketplace seller, see guide to setup seller.For marketplace buyer, see guide to setup buyer.You can participate as both seller and buyer.
---
# New Feature: SMTP Profile for Better Email Deliverability (Posted 03/08/2022)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6922000756343/new-feature-smtp-profile-for-better-email-deliverability-posted-03082022
Today we're adding the most important feature for email deliverability, SMTP Profile. The predecessor of this feature is email domains. We've fully migrated email domains to SMTP profiles. In general, you do not need to make any changes.The details below are for users who want to explore more options for email deliverability. If you are not sending much emails (1000 or more emails per month), you can skip this announcement.Type image caption here (optional)What is a SMTP Profile?SMTP profile determines the configurations used for delivering email and via which domain. OnVoard doesn't do the actual delivery of emails. Instead, we're integrated with SMTP providers like Sendgrid and Postmark which will do the job for email delivery. In fact, very few email marketing platforms does email delivery in-house, since dealing with email blacklists is an extremely painful process.By default, all marketing emails that runs through OnVoard are delivered via our Sendgrid account. The introduction of SMTP profile provides additional options for you to determine how you want your emails to be delivered.Read Guide for SMTP ProfileSending OptionsIn general, there are 3 kinds of sending options you can configure for SMTP profile.1) Use onvoard-mail.com (Default)This is the default option provided for all accounts. Emails will be delivered via onvoard-mail.com domain using OnVoard's Sendgrid account. For better control over deliverability, we recommend most users to choose option 2 and use your own domain for sending. Emails sent from your own domain will not have "via onvoard-mail.com" message.Sending from onvoard-mail.comSending from your own domain2) Use your own domain (Recommended for most users)This is what we recommend for most users. Delivering via your own domain ensures that you can build up email reputation for your own domain. This is better for your business in the long run since you have better control over deliverability.Use your own domain for sending3) Use your own SMTP provider account (For advanced users)This is the key feature for SMTP profile that you can't find on other email marketing platforms.For advanced users, you can even configure to use your own SMTP provider account for sending. Below are the benefits for doing so:You will gain full control over deliverability. For example, you can setup dedicated IP in your SMTP provider account for sending.Save usage charges. OnVoard will charge your email transit usage instead of email sends usage when you use your own SMTP for sending.More in-depth email stats. You can login directly to your SMTP provider account to view raw email stats.Keep in mind that we only recommend this for advanced users who knows what they are doing. For more, you can see the following guides for setting up with own SMTP.Use your own Sendgrid account for sendingUse your own Postmark account for sendingAvailable SMTP ProviderCurrently, Sendgrid and Postmark are the 2 SMTP providers that we support. We have plans to support the following SMTP providers in the future.Amazon SESMailgunSparkPostUse OnVoard's Postmark Account for SendingAs mentioned earlier, by default we'll deliver all emails via our Sendgrid account.We also allow whitelisted users to sent emails via our Postmark account. It may yield better deliverability based on our experience. You can contact us if you wish to be whitelisted to send via OnVoard's Postmark account. Keep in mind the following requirements to be approved.Must be an account with subscribed to OnVoard for at least a few months. We don't approve new accounts.Account must have shown good delivery stats with certain volume.In general, we need to be assured that you are a trusted sender with good email reputation.
---
# Summer Updates 2021 for OnVoard Marketing Platform (Posted 07/24/2021)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921956320070/summer-updates-2021-for-onvoard-marketing-platform-posted-07242021
Here are the 2021 summer updates for OnVoard marketing platform. Flows is now Workflows. Below is a breakdown of changes made.Simplification and RedesignWorkflows setup has been greatly simplified. See our documentation on playbooks. Now you only need to edit a couple of fields to setup workflow automation. Most of the setup can be done within 10 mins. Segment templates, email templates and workflow playbooks have all been redesigned as well.Email KindsEmail is now categorized as broadcast emails or workflow emails. Only broadcast emails can be broadcasted while workflow emails are emails used in workflows.Email Sending RulesSending rules helps to prevent overwhelming email sends to contacts so that you won't annoy them with too many emails within a short period of time. By default, we will skip if same email has been delivered within the last 5 hours (300 minutes).You can also override skip rules individually for each email.Product Recommendations in EmailsYou can now use recommender app to generate and add product recommendations within emails. This is a very powerful feature since it opens up tons of opportunities for you to cross-sell to your customers with each email sends. For example, you can embed "People Also Buy" recommendations in low stock emails, or "You May Be Interested" recommendations in any emails based on contact's previous purchase/browsing activity.What's even better is that you can add meta labels for your recommendations to make it more compelling.See guide on how to use product recommendations in email.Newly Supported WorkflowsLow Stock. Inform users that stock level is running low for products they've shown interest.Price Drop. Inform users that price has dropped for products they've shown interest.Replenishment. Send replenishment notification if contact didn't repurchase after a brief period.Welcome Series. Run through a series of messages to welcome new contacts.Winback. Reach out to existing customers who have not place order over a long period of time.Monthly Product Recommendations. Send monthly product recommendations like new arrivals or top sellers to subscribers.For more, go to workflow playbooks page.Workflow AnnotationYou can now add notes inside workflow. In fact, I have added notes in our playbooks to illustrate what each step does.Email StepSince sending email is so commonly used in workflows, I have separated it from action step. You can use email step to add and select workflow email.Notification StepSend internal email notification to admin. The difference with email step is that you won't be adding new email. Instead, email content can be specified in step.Wait StepWait until conditions are met. You can also set a time limit to cap waiting time. For example, wait until a contact is double opted-in, before sending them a marketing email.Workflow Entry RequirementsEntry requirements allows you to specify conditions that must be met before contact is eligible to be added to workflow.The most common example is to filter contacts who've not been previously added to this workflow. This ensure that contact will only enter workflow once.Workflow RequirementsWorkflow requirements are like global conditions. It will be checked before trigger/email/action steps. If requirements are not met, contacts will exit from workflow.For example, in checkout abandonment workflow, you may have multiple email steps to be delivered over a period of time. In this case, you would want to exit workflow and stop sending abandonment email if the contact has placed order after entering workflow.Workflow AnalyticsView email analytics on workflow level. This is the aggregation of stats for emails assigned to workflow.
---
# Email Editor Improvements: Product Picker + Adjustable Columns Widths (Posted 01/30/2021)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921884215972/email-editor-improvements-product-picker-adjustable-columns-widths-posted-01302021
I've just released some improvements to OnVoard's email editor. Here's a quick 1 minute rundown to get you familiarized with the improvements made.Product PickerList of available products for selectionsThe new product picker allows you to easily select products to add to product list block. This is one feature I'm sure would benefit many merchants given how tedious it was to manually select products previously.Adjustable Columns WidthsPreview of slider to adjust column widths. You can add up to 3 columns.Previously, OnVoard only supports fixed column widths like (50% by 50%). This new release now supports an option to adjust widths for each row column.The above example shows how we can use it to customize the width for image and text blocks that is on the same row.That is all, a quick 1 minute rundown on some improvements made.
---
# Language Customizations for Reviews App is finally here. (Posted 01/22/2021)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921875682937/language-customizations-for-reviews-app-is-finally-here-posted-01222021
Great news! I've just released an update to OnVoard's Reviews App to support full language customizations. This release allows you to translate the widget to any language, even Na'vi!Preview of translation in reviews widget editorMore than 50% of OnVoard's merchants run a non-English store, which is why this is also one of the most requested features that we've received so far.You can go to the following pages and edit your pages/widgets to start translating:Reviews CollectorsReviews WidgetsStar RatingsFAQsWhat language can I translate to? You can translate to any language you want. Reviews app provides you with full customization options to configure every widget labels.Is there auto-translation? No. Auto translation may not always end up with the output that merchant wants, so providing full customization is the way to go.
---
# OnVoard PopBoxes (Posted 01/17/2019)
Topic: Updates | Section: Product Changes
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921674576889/onvoard-popboxes-posted-01172019
Another month, another new addition to OnVoard's product suite. Here's a short backstory on how I came up with this new product.Before I started OnVoard, I was working on a food review startup called Eatasy to help make food search easier than flight search. I will leave the part on why I decided to move on from that in the future (probably in another post) but one of the key design is to automatically split long-winded reviews into individual phrases highlighting key points.How a long-winded review looks like.Sorry mate, but I rather spent my time reading through Stephen King's worksMost people wouldn't even bother reading past the first paragraph. Putting myself on the reader's perspective, I know that most visitors would only read up till the first 3-4 lines of a review. They want to know in the most concise manner why a place is recommended. And no, they don't care about how you and your spouse first met at that cafe in downtown.So this is what I did is to create a summarized version of each review.Split reviews into individual sentencesMeasure emotions and sentiments of each sentenceExtract sentences with high emotion index or extreme sentiment valuesFrom extracted sentences, our system will automatically pick up to 5 sentences to display based on the calculated score.Here's how the final summarized version looks like on Eatasy's app. Notice how each point highlights key features of the place. Not too shabby right?Digging through my archives folderExtracting key highlights from a review makes information much easier to grok.Back to OnVoardOne of OnVoard's key market segments is local service businesses. While prospecting for new customers in the air-con servicing space, I noticed that many of them are social proof notifications to show stats for recent purchases/visitors.Billy Aircon using Proof for notificationsA stroke of brilliance came to my mind. Why not extract key highlights from existing customer reviews and use it as social proof? After all, the whole concept of social proof is to build credibility and nothing beats authentic customer reviews in convincing visitors that your product is tried and tested.OnVoard PopBoxesBy adding a popbox snippet to your page, OnVoard is able to automatically extract positive quotes from your existing reviews and render them as social proof.Sample of how PopBoxes looks like on a pagePopBox supports 2 types of notifications.Rating Notification - Show listing's overall rating details in notifications to convince visitors that your brand is tried and tested by other users.Quote Notification - Show quotes extracted from reviews to highlight key aspects on why your brand is chosen by reviewers.Sample of how rating and quote notification looks likeQuotes SelectionsWe know that predictions may not always be accurate in sentiment analysis and there may be negative quotes that are incorrectly classified. Instead of leaving the grunt work to machines, you can opt to only display quotes that are manually shortlisted. This will give you full control over quotes that are shown on your site.Quotes Selections OptionsFuture ConsiderationsWe want to keep things simple and easy to use for the start. There are some ideas on how to take things further for the future.One of the initial concepts was to be able to route and show review quotes or listing details for outlet nearest to the visitor. For example, we know that Pizza Hut has hundreds of stores in many cities. Instead of displaying reviews from a random store, why not find the store nearest to the user's location and select review and listing from there?We didn't implement this concept because:It will obviously be much more complex to implement and setupWe don't have enough knowledge as to whether third-party social proof notifications would attract sufficient interest from large multi-chain businesses. From what we know, most sites that use social proof notifications are run by small businesses or are in the e-commerce space.Another concept was to consider adding frequency and recency cap to notifications. However, this will introduce tracking concerns that can be easily avoided.Of course, there's a possibility that none of these concepts will be implemented due to negative benefits-to-complexity tradeoffs.PreviewFor now, take a look at a live demo for OnVoard PopBoxes and let us know what you think.For the next post, I'll be laying out the technical implementations of OnVoard PopBoxes and some of the decisions made in building our Widgets library.
---
# Things to know before you serve third-party widgets (Posted 01/23/2019)
Topic: Updates | Section: Engineering
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_6921689470745/things-to-know-before-you-serve-third-party-widgets-posted-01232019
While building out widgets library for OnVoard PopBoxes, I took great inspiration from many existing implementations by companies like Intercom and Zendesk. Not much has been written on building third-party widgets. As such, this post will illustrate some of the key learnings and considerations to evaluate before you serve third-party widgets.Smart WidgetsAs I was looking through implementation examples for widgets, what surprises me was that most widgets that you see on plugins marketplace are what I call Dumb Widgets.Dumb Widgets are essentially static components that can't be interacted or modified in a programmatic manner. They have no API interface that you can interact with so you are pretty much stuck with the default setup that is provided.So, why is it so important to provide an API interface to modify config? Take a look at how we interact with Intercom's chat widget via API below.On OnVoard's home page, we have 2 widgets that will be shown to visitors on fixed positions.GDPR notification widgetIntercom's chat widgetLooks pretty straightforward on desktop right?Now take a look at how the UX works on a mobile device which has limited screen estate.Chat widget will be shown after GDPR notification is clickedOn initial load, we will call Intercom('hide') to hide Intercom's chat widget. But after GDPR's notification has been confirmed, we will call Intercom('show') to show the previously hidden chat widget.Well, everything looks good when are working with a smart widget similar to the one Intercom provides. But what if Intercom doesn't provide any API interface?I'm pretty sure everyone has encountered pages with this sort of overlaying issues on their mobile device. And no, z-index isn't the right way to fix this sort of issues because component A may not always fully overlay over component B.Make it easy to work with your widget. At the very least, you should provide API interface to show or hide your widget.Consider using loaderOne question you need to ask yourself before building out widgets is how many types of widgets do you intend to serve in the future. If you are going to serve multiple widgets, you may want to consider using a loader.How it works is that instead of requiring your user to place snippets for each widget types, they can add a loader snippet and the loader will determine which widget to load at runtime. This setup works great when you need to serve many different types of widgets.Below is a sample of widget snippet used in OnVoard. The user can simply add 1 single code snippet to their site and specify widget to display under onvoardConfig variable.Ideally, structure your code so that users only need to add snippet once.Command PatternOne of the commonly used pattern to interact with third-party widgets is the command pattern. Both Intercom and Zendesk use this design for their JavaScript API. Essentially, command pattern allows you to interact with API via a single interface even when you are dealing with multiple sub-resources (widgets).# show web widget zE('webWidget', 'show'); # send chat message zE('webWidget', 'chat:send', 'I\'d like the Jambalaya, please'); # set suggestions for help center zE('webWidget', 'helpCenter:setSuggestions', { search: 'credit card' });Examples with Zendesk's APIOnVoard(, , )How OnVoard's schema for command pattern looks like thisOnVoard('popbox', 'reload', {on: false}); OnVoard('reviewsWidget', 'shutdown');Various examples on how you can make API calls with OnVoard's widgetPretty neat right? For now, we only provide popbox for now but there are certainly plans to add more widgets in the future.VersioningThis is where I think most people miss out. If you have no intention to make any changes to your widget then you don't need to use versioning for your widgets. However, most of us will need to make modifications or design changes to widgets. If you are not making changes to a different version, you will eventually break your user's site. Unfortunately, there are very few vendors (Yotpo is one of them) who provide any sort of versioning for their widgets.For us, what we did was to provide options for the user to nail down on a specific version. Alternatively, the user can opt to stick to the latest version.Preview of OnVoard's Widget SettingsAlways provide versioning for your widgets if you can.
---
# Guide for Affiliate Program
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: Partner Program
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319665690/guide-for-affiliate-program
With OnVoard affiliate program you can:
Earn $10 for each referral that upgrades
Plus 20% ongoing commission
Give referrals $10 off their monthly subscription.
How it works
First, you need to register for an OnVoard account.
After that login to your OnVoard account. All registered users are automatically enrolled into our affiliate program.
Since payouts are made via paypal, go to partner overview and update your paypal email.
To generate affiliate links, go to coupons and create coupon code to give your referrals $10/mo off their subscription.
How can referrals apply coupon?
There are 2 ways coupon can be applied.
Affiliate Link - When referral sign up for an OnVoard account via your affiliate link, coupon will be automatically applied to their account.
Subscriptions Page - Alternatively, they can apply the coupon in subscriptions page. After the coupon is applied, they will be shown a discounted plan.
Do you have a coupon code for me to get discounted plan?
Use PARTNER10OFF if you need to get discounted plan for your own account. We created this coupon for you to get $10/mo off your own subscription.
Do not create multiple logins to generate coupon code for yourself. We consider this as an affiliate fraud and will revoke commissions.
Prohibited Activities
Do not create multiple logins to earn commissions on your own purchases. We consider this as an affiliate fraud and will revoke commissions.
Coupon & deal sites are not accepted.
See Also
FAQs for Partners
---
# Guide for Agency Partners
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: Partner Program
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319283710/guide-for-agency-partners
If you represent an agency, we would like to work with you.
There are no fees to be OnVoard's agency partner.
Your agency will be listed on our agency partners directory page. This will bring additional exposure and free leads for your business.
Agency partner get 20% commission for all managed accounts.
After approval, managed accounts will have access to discounted plan ($10/mo off).
How it works
First, you need to register for an OnVoard account.
After that login to your OnVoard account.
Since payouts are made via paypal, go to partner overview and update your paypal email.
Next, go to this page to fill in agency application. Submission process will take 1-3 days. We will follow-up with you via email.
See Also
FAQs for Partners
---
# FAQs for Partners
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: Partner Program
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318960480/faqs-for-partners
When will monthly commissions be computed?
Commissions are computed on 1st of each month after referral accounts has been charged. After that, if unpaid commissions exceeds minimum threshold, we'll generate payout on 3rd of each month. Generated payout will be in Awaiting state, until actual payout has been made.
When do you payout commissions?
We pay on 15th of each month via paypal.
What is the minimum payout threshold?
By default, minimum payout is $100. You can increase it up to $5000.
Scenarios where commissions won't be generated
If referral is on legacy plan.
If referral has cancelled subscription.
If subscription payment failed.
If referral converts to an agency account
What happens if a referral converts to an agency account?
They will be removed as referral. Agencies won't be treated referrals since they already have 20% commission for managed accounts.
Can I be both an affiliate and agency at the same time?
Yes. Commission earned as an affiliate will be based on referred accounts while commission earned as an agency will be based on managed accounts. So if you run an agency and refer users to us, we will still attribute commission to you as an affiliate.
---
# Use OnVoard for Checkout Abandonment Flow
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319426572/use-onvoard-for-checkout-abandonment-flow
70% of your customers leave checkout without buying. These shoppers have shown great interest in your products by initiating checkout. For some reasons, like high shipping costs, they didn't complete the final purchase. With OnVoard, you can automatically recover these customers with abandonment emails and gain additional revenue for your ecommerce store.
Why use OnVoard for Checkout Abandonment Flow?
By default, you can use EasyStore to automatically send reminder email to customers 24 hours after they've abandoned checkout. OnVoard can be a good choice if you need to:
Configure when to send abandonment email.
Send different emails based on user attributes. For example, only send an email with coupon code if user has spent at least $100 with store.
Track users who've opened/clicked/converted from your email.
A/B test variations of abandonment email.
Embed product reviews and ratings onto email to sell more.
The following guide is written by OnVoard. If you require any assistance or prefer to let us setup for you, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
Register OnVoard Account
To start, register for an OnVoard account. After you've registered, confirm your email and login to your OnVoard account.
Install OnVoard App
Next, go to OnVoard's app listing page and install the app.
Install Web Tracking
After you have connected OnVoard to EasyStore account, we need to install web tracking to your store. Web tracking allows us to automatically identify users who've initiated checkouts but didn't make a purchase.
Go to web trackings page and add web tracking.
Select EasyStore for Platform.
From EasyStore Tracking, turn on Auto Track.
From EasyStore Activities, turn on Checkout Started. You can turn on other activities as well if you are using cart/browse abandonment flow.
Select Connection to use for installation.
Click Save to create web tracking. OnVoard will automatically install and update web tracking on your store.
Create Email Profile
To start sending emails, you need to first setup an email profile. Go to email profiles page and add a new profile. After adding, we will send a verification email to ensure that you have access to the added email address.
Create Checkout Abandonment Email
Next, we'll be creating checkout abandonment email to send to users. Go to emails page and add a new email.
To simplify email setup, select Checkout Abandonment template. We'll work from this template.
Go to Settings tab and add the following resources:
EasyStore Checkout Started
Added resource will provide us with data needed to display cart items. Select Content tab to go back to editor.
Inside email editor, select product list block to configure.
Select Resource Property for Data Input.
Select EasyStore Checkout Started for Config > Resource.
The config above will dynamically generate a list of cart items from abandoned checkout. Adjust the rest of email configurations according to your preference and click Submit to save email.
Create Checkout Abandonment Flow
Now that email is created, we can setup flow the automate the whole process of recovering checkout abandonment users. Go to flow playbooks page and select Checkout Abandonment playbook for EasyStore.
Most of the flow setup has already been done for you. Regardless, minor configurations need to be made before the flow is ready.
Select Send Email (Step 5). Then select checkout abandonment email that you've created earlier for sending.
Click Submit to create flow. That's it, now OnVoard will automatically recover checkout abandonment users from your store.
Disable Abandoned Checkout Recovery in EasyStore
If you are using OnVoard to send checkout abandonment emails, you should disable abandoned checkout recovery option in EasyStore to avoid sending redundant emails to your users.
Go to EasyStore checkout settings page.
Scroll to Abandoned Checkout section and ensure that automated cart recovery has been turned off.
Click Save to submit changes.
---
# Use OnVoard for Cart Abandonment Flow
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556319013313/use-onvoard-for-cart-abandonment-flow
A cart is abandoned when a customer adds an item to their cart, but leaves your store without making a purchase. Since adding items to cart is a strong indicator for purchase intent, getting these customers back to your store could mean additional revenue for your business. To do so, you can use OnVoard to send cart abandonment emails and automatically recover these lost revenues.
The following guide is written by OnVoard. If you require any assistance or prefer to let us setup for you, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
Register OnVoard Account
To start, register for an OnVoard account. After you've registered, confirm your email and login to your OnVoard account.
Install OnVoard App
Next, go to OnVoard's app listing page and install the app.
Install Web Tracking
After you have connected OnVoard to EasyStore account, we need to install web tracking to your store. Web tracking allows us to automatically identify users who've added cart items but didn't make a purchase.
Go to web trackings page and add web tracking.
Select EasyStore for Platform.
From EasyStore Tracking, turn on Auto Track.
From EasyStore Activities, turn on Cart Item Added. You can turn on other activities as well if you are using checkout/browse abandonment flow.
Select Connection to use for installation.
Click Save to create web tracking. OnVoard will automatically install and update web tracking on your store.
Create Email Profile
To start sending emails, you need to first setup an email profile. Go to email profiles page and add a new profile. After adding, we will send a verification email to ensure that you have access to the added email address.
Create Cart Abandonment Email
Next, we'll be creating cart abandonment email to send to users. Go to emails page and add a new email.
To simplify email setup, you can use pre-built cart abandonment templates. In this example, we'll select Cart Abandonment (Single Product).
Go to Settings tab and you should see that Product resource has already been added. Add the following resources as well:
EasyStore Cart Item Added
EasyStore Product
Adjust the rest of email configurations according to your preference and click Submit to save email.
After email is created, copy email ID. We'll be using it later in flow.
Create Cart Abandonment Flow
Now that email is created, we can setup flow the automate the whole process of recovering cart abandonment users. Go to flow playbooks page and select Cart Abandonment playbook for EasyStore.
Most of the flow setup has already been done for you. Regardless, minor configurations need to be made before the flow is ready.
Select Filter (Step 6). Scroll to bottom of logic conditions and locate Email Delivered (OnVoard) condition. Then paste email ID to exclude contacts who've received the same cart abandonment email within the last 14 days. This setup is to prevent us from overwhelming users with cart abandonment emails.
For starters, we recommend sticking to 14 days for exclusion. Feel free to adjust exclusion window accordingly.
Select Send Email (Step 7). Then select cart abandonment email that you've created earlier for sending.
Click Submit to create flow. That's it, now OnVoard will automatically recover cart abandonment users from your store.
---
# Use OnVoard for Browse Abandonment Flow
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318898752/use-onvoard-for-browse-abandonment-flow
More than 90% of users visit your ecommerce store without buying. To get these users back to your store, you can use OnVoard to automatically send browse abandonment emails to users who've visited product page but leaves your store without making a purchase.
This is similar to how retargeting campaigns work. But in this case, we are using emails instead of ads to get users back to your store.
The following guide is written by OnVoard. If you require any assistance or prefer to let us setup for you, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
Register OnVoard Account
To start, register for an OnVoard account. After you've registered, confirm your email and login to your OnVoard account.
Install OnVoard App
Next, go to OnVoard's app listing page and install the app.
Install Web Tracking
After you have connected OnVoard to EasyStore account, we need to install web tracking to your store. Web tracking allows us to automatically identify users who've viewed products but didn't make a purchase.
Go to web trackings page and add web tracking.
Select EasyStore for Platform.
From EasyStore Tracking, turn on Auto Track.
From EasyStore Activities, turn on Product Viewed. You can turn on other activities as well if you are using checkout/cart abandonment flow.
Select Connection to use for installation.
Click Save to create web tracking. OnVoard will automatically install and update web tracking on your store.
Create Email Profile
To start sending emails, you need to first setup an email profile. Go to email profiles page and add a new profile. After adding, we will send a verification email to ensure that you have access to the added email address.
Create Browse Abandonment Email
Next, we'll be creating browse abandonment email to send to users. Go to emails page and add a new email.
To simplify email setup, you can use pre-built cart abandonment templates for Browse Abandonment emails.
Select Cart Abandonment (Single Product) if you want to recommend single product.
Select Cart Abandonment (Multiple Products) if you want to recommend multiple products.
In this example, we'll select Cart Abandonment (Multiple Products).
Go to Settings tab and add the following resources:
Product
EasyStore Product
EasyStore Product Viewed
Select Content tab to go back to editor.
Inside email editor, select product list block to configure.
Select Query Resource Records for Data Input.
Select EasyStore Product Viewed for Config > Resource.
Scroll to Query Resource Records section.
Add condition to query records where Contact Email equals {{ contact.email }}. This will return a list of products viewed by user.
Select Activity Datetime [High to Low] to sort by most recent viewed products.
Turn on Exclude Past Purchases so that you won't display products that have already been purchased by contact.
The config above will dynamically generate a list of products viewed by user. Adjust the rest of email configurations according to your preference and click Submit to save email.
After email is created, copy email ID. We'll be using it later in flow.
Create Browse Abandonment Flow
Now that email is created, we can setup flow the automate the whole process of recovering browse abandonment users. Go to flow playbooks page and select Browse Abandonment playbook for EasyStore.
Most of the flow setup has already been done for you. Regardless, minor configurations need to be made before the flow is ready.
Select Filter (Step 6). Scroll to bottom of logic conditions and locate Email Delivered (OnVoard) condition. Then paste email ID to exclude contacts who've received the same browse abandonment email within the last 30 days. This setup is to prevent us from overwhelming users with browse abandonment emails.
For starters, we recommend sticking to 30 days for exclusion. Feel free to adjust exclusion window accordingly.
Select Send Email (Step 7). Then select browse abandonment email that you've created earlier for sending.
Click Submit to create flow. That's it, now OnVoard will automatically recover browse abandonment users from your store.
---
# Use OnVoard to Collect Product Reviews
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318631059/use-onvoard-to-collect-product-reviews
One easy way to collect more product reviews is to sent review request email to customers after their order has been fulfilled. With OnVoard, you can automate the whole process of sending review request emails to your customers and collecting product reviews.
The following guide is written by OnVoard. If you require any assistance or prefer to let us setup for you, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
Register OnVoard Account
To start, register for an OnVoard account. After you've registered, confirm your email and login to your OnVoard account.
Install OnVoard App
Next, go to OnVoard's app listing page and install the app.
Import Products Data
After connecting OnVoard to your EasyStore account, we'll be importing products from your store. Go to imports job page and add a new import job.
Select Integrations for Method.
Select Product for Destination.
Select EasyStore Product to OnVoard Product [Predefined] for Data Mapping.
Select Connection to use for import.
Click Save to add job.
After import job is created, locate the job in imports job page and click Execute.
From modal dialog, click Execute to start import.
Create Reviews Collector
Next, we'll create a reviews collector page for collecting product reviews. Users will be directed from email to reviews collector page where they can submit their reviews.
Go to reviews collector page and add a new collector.
Select Product for Layout.
Click Submit to create reviews collector.
Create Email Profile
To start sending emails, you need to first setup an email profile. Go to email profiles page and add a new profile. After adding, we will send a verification email to ensure that you have access to the added email address.
Create Review Request Email
Next, we'll be creating review request email to send to users. Go to emails page and add a new email.
Select Product Review (Post Purchase) template. We'll be working from this template.
Go to Settings tab and add the following resources:
EasyStore Order
EasyStore Order Fulfilled
After you have added these 2 resources, Reviews Collector section will be shown.
Note: This section will only be shown if order related resources like EasyStore Order has been added to email.
Select Enable Variable.
Select Reviews Collector that you've created earlier.
Select EasyStore Order for Resource.
Now you can use misc.reviews_collector_url variable to direct users to reviews collector page. Next, select Content tab to go back to editor.
Inside email editor, select product list block to configure.
Select Resource Property for Data Input.
Select EasyStore Order for Config > Resource.
Scroll to Product Properties and click Add Property.
Specify reviews_collector_url for Key.
Select Global Variables for Data From.
Select misc.reviews_collector_url for Data.
Click Save to add product property.
Once saved, reviews collector url can be access via {{ product.reviews_collector_url }} inside product template.
Scroll to Button Style.
By default, button will link users to product url.
Replace Link URL with {{ product.reviews_collector_url }} to direct user to reviews collector page.
The above configurations will dynamically generate list of products from order and direct users to reviews collector page. Adjust the rest of email configurations according to your preferences and click Submit to save email.
Create Product Review Flow
Now that email is created, we can setup flow the automate the whole process of sending review request email whenever an order has been fulfilled. Go to flow playbooks page and select Product Review playbook for EasyStore.
Most of the flow setup has already been done for you. Regardless, minor configurations need to be made before the flow is ready.
Select Send Email (Step 4). Then select review request email that you've created earlier for sending.
Click Submit to create flow. That's it, now OnVoard will automatically send review request email to customer whenever their order has been marked as fulfilled.
Use Coupons to get More Reviews (Optional)
One way to encourage customers to leave reviews is to incentivize them with discount coupons whenever they leave a review. With OnVoard, you can easily send discount coupon email whenever a customer leaves a review.
For that, you need to prepare a discount coupon email.
Go to emails page and add a new email.
Select Coupon Discount (After Leaving Review) template.
Go to Settings tab and add Review resource. Modify the rest of email outlook according to your preferences and click Submit to save email.
After email is ready, go to flow playbooks page and select Coupon Discount (After Leaving Review) playbook.
Select Send Email (Step 3). Then specify discount coupon email to use for sending. Click Submit to create flow. There you go, now you've level up your review request automation. Discount coupon email will be automatically delivered whenever someone leaves a review.
---
# Use OnVoard to Display Product Reviews
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318473070/use-onvoard-to-display-product-reviews
Reviews serve as social proofs to convince shoppers that your products have been tried and tested. With OnVoard, you can embed reviews widget to product page and showcase reviews for individual products. Beyond that, you can also:
Allow reviewers to attach photo and video.
Automatically sent discount coupon email to reviewers.
Respond to reviews.
Notify reviewers after their review has been responded.
Embed product reviews into your abandonment emails.
See our demo store to view live example for reviews widget.
The following guide is written by OnVoard. If you require any assistance or prefer to let us setup for you, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
Register OnVoard Account
To start, register for an OnVoard account. After you've registered, confirm your email and login to your OnVoard account.
Install OnVoard App
Next, go to OnVoard's app listing page and install the app.
Install Web Tracking
After you have connected OnVoard to EasyStore account, we need to install web tracking to your store. Web tracking will automatically add loader code to your store. Loader code is used to load code required to display reviews widget.
Go to web trackings page and add web tracking.
Select EasyStore for Platform.
Select Connection to use for installation.
Click Save to create web tracking. OnVoard will automatically install snippet to your store.
Create Reviews Widget
Go to reviews widget page and add a new widget.
After reviews widget is created, copy the widget ID. Replace REVIEWS_WIDGET_ID for snippet below with actual reviews widget ID.
Then copy modified snippet. We'll be placing it in your EasyStore theme.
Go to EasyStore Admin Themes and click Edit Source to modify theme source.
Select templates/product.liquid.
There's no hard rule in where you should place snippet for reviews widget. In most cases, you would place it before the end of product content. For our live demo example, we are placing snippet before related products.
Click Save to invoke changes. That's it, reviews widget should be shown on your product page. If you need more help, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
---
# Use OnVoard to Display Star Ratings for Products
Topic: Partner with OnVoard | Section: EasyStore
URL: https://help.onvoard.com/articles/art_3556318498639/use-onvoard-to-display-star-ratings-for-products
Adding star ratings to your product listings is an effective way to establish trust with your shoppers. With OnVoard, you can embed star ratings to product listings and display aggregated ratings from product reviews.
See our demo store to view live example for star ratings.
The following guide is written by OnVoard. If you require any assistance or prefer to let us setup for you, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
Register OnVoard Account
To start, register for an OnVoard account. After you've registered, confirm your email and login to your OnVoard account.
Install OnVoard App
Next, go to OnVoard's app listing page and install the app.
Install Web Tracking
After you have connected OnVoard to EasyStore account, we need to install web tracking to your store. Web tracking will automatically add loader code to your store. Loader code is used to load code required to display star rating.
Go to web trackings page and add web tracking.
Select EasyStore for Platform.
Select Connection to use for installation.
Click Save to create web tracking. OnVoard will automatically install snippet to your store.
Create Star Rating
Go to star ratings page and add a new star rating.
After star rating is created, copy the ID. Replace STAR_RATING_ID for snippet below with actual star rating ID.
Then copy modified snippet. We'll be placing it in your EasyStore theme.
Go to EasyStore Admin Themes and click Edit Source to modify theme source.
Select snippet/product-grid-item.liquid.
Place snippet based on where you want star ratings to be shown for each product listing. For our live demo example, we are placing snippet after meta section and before add to cart button. Click Save to invoke changes.
In most cases, you would also want to display star rating widget on product page.
Select templates/product.liquid.
Place star rating snippet depending on where you want it to be shown in product page.
For our example, we are placing snippet after price section.
Click Save to invoke changes.
Lastly, keep in mind that star ratings will only be shown if there are at least 1 published review for designated product. If you need more help, feel free to contact us at support@onvoard.com.
---